Merge branch 'linus' into timers/hpet

.gitignore

@@ -3,6 +3,10 @@
 # subdirectories here. Add them in the ".gitignore" file
 # in that subdirectory instead.
 #
+# NOTE! Please use 'git-ls-files -i --exclude-standard'
+# command after changing this file, to see if there are
+# any tracked files which get ignored after the change.
+#
 # Normal rules
 #
 .*
@@ -18,18 +22,21 @@
 *.lst
 *.symtypes
 *.order
+*.elf
+*.bin
+*.gz
 
 #
 # Top-level generic files
 #
 tags
 TAGS
-vmlinux*
-!vmlinux.lds.S
+vmlinux
 System.map
 Module.markers
 Module.symvers
 !.gitignore
+!.mailmap
 
 #
 # Generated include files

CREDITS

@@ -317,6 +317,14 @@ S: 2322 37th Ave SW
 S: Seattle, Washington 98126-2010
 S: USA
 
+N: Muli Ben-Yehuda
+E: mulix@mulix.org
+E: muli@il.ibm.com
+W: http://www.mulix.org
+D: trident OSS sound driver, x86-64 dma-ops and Calgary IOMMU,
+D: KVM and Xen bits and other misc. hackery.
+S: Haifa, Israel
+
 N: Johannes Berg
 E: johannes@sipsolutions.net
 W: http://johannes.sipsolutions.net/
@@ -2611,8 +2619,9 @@ S: Perth, Western Australia
 S: Australia
 
 N: Miguel Ojeda Sandonis
-E: maxextreme@gmail.com
-W: http://maxextreme.googlepages.com/
+E: miguel.ojeda.sandonis@gmail.com
+W: http://miguelojeda.es
+W: http://jair.lab.fi.uva.es/~migojed/
 D: Author of the ks0108, cfag12864b and cfag12864bfb auxiliary display drivers.
 D: Maintainer of the auxiliary display drivers tree (drivers/auxdisplay/*)
 S: C/ Mieses 20, 9-B
@@ -3343,8 +3352,7 @@ S: Spain
 N: Linus Torvalds
 E: torvalds@linux-foundation.org
 D: Original kernel hacker
-S: 12725 SW Millikan Way, Suite 400
-S: Beaverton, Oregon 97005
+S: Portland, Oregon 97005
 S: USA
 
 N: Marcelo Tosatti

Documentation/00-INDEX

@@ -359,8 +359,6 @@ telephony/
 	- directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
 time_interpolators.txt
 	- info on time interpolators.
-tipar.txt
-	- information about Parallel link cable for Texas Instruments handhelds.
 tty.txt
 	- guide to the locking policies of the tty layer.
 uml/

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block

@@ -26,3 +26,37 @@ Description:
 		I/O statistics of partition <part>. The format is the
 		same as the above-written /sys/block/<disk>/stat
 		format.
+
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/integrity/format
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
+Description:
+		Metadata format for integrity capable block device.
+		E.g. T10-DIF-TYPE1-CRC.
+
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/integrity/read_verify
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates whether the block layer should verify the
+		integrity of read requests serviced by devices that
+		support sending integrity metadata.
+
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/integrity/tag_size
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
+Description:
+		Number of bytes of integrity tag space available per
+		512 bytes of data.
+
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/integrity/write_generate
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates whether the block layer should automatically
+		generate checksums for write requests bound for
+		devices that support receiving integrity metadata.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/css/devices/.../type
+Date:		March 2008
+Contact:	Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com>
+		linux-s390@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Contains the subchannel type, as reported by the hardware.
+		This attribute is present for all subchannel types.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/css/devices/.../modalias
+Date:		March 2008
+Contact:	Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com>
+		linux-s390@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Contains the module alias as reported with uevents.
+		It is of the format css:t<type> and present for all
+		subchannel types.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/css/drivers/io_subchannel/.../chpids
+Date:		December 2002
+Contact:	Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com>
+		linux-s390@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Contains the ids of the channel paths used by this
+		subchannel, as reported by the channel subsystem
+		during subchannel recognition.
+		Note: This is an I/O-subchannel specific attribute.
+Users:		s390-tools, HAL
+
+What:		/sys/bus/css/drivers/io_subchannel/.../pimpampom
+Date:		December 2002
+Contact:	Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com>
+		linux-s390@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Contains the PIM/PAM/POM values, as reported by the
+		channel subsystem when last queried by the common I/O
+		layer (this implies that this attribute is not neccessarily
+		in sync with the values current in the channel subsystem).
+		Note: This is an I/O-subchannel specific attribute.
+Users:		s390-tools, HAL

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev

@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:		/sys/dev
+Date:		April 2008
+KernelVersion:	2.6.26
+Contact:	Dan Williams <dan.j.williams@intel.com>
+Description:	The /sys/dev tree provides a method to look up the sysfs
+		path for a device using the information returned from
+		stat(2).  There are two directories, 'block' and 'char',
+		beneath /sys/dev containing symbolic links with names of
+		the form "<major>:<minor>".  These links point to the
+		corresponding sysfs path for the given device.
+
+		Example:
+		$ readlink /sys/dev/block/8:32
+		../../block/sdc
+
+		Entries in /sys/dev/char and /sys/dev/block will be
+		dynamically created and destroyed as devices enter and
+		leave the system.
+
+Users:		mdadm <linux-raid@vger.kernel.org>

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory

@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/system/memory
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/system/memory contains a snapshot of the
+		internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be
+		added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove
+		operations.
+
+Users:		hotplug memory add/remove tools
+		https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+		The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
+		indicates whether this memory block is removable or not.
+		This is useful for a user-level agent to determine
+		identify removable sections of the memory before attempting
+		potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation
+
+Users:		hotplug memory remove tools
+		https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi

@@ -29,46 +29,46 @@ Description:
 
 		$ cd /sys/firmware/acpi/interrupts
 		$ grep . *
-		error:0
-		ff_gbl_lock:0
-		ff_pmtimer:0
-		ff_pwr_btn:0
-		ff_rt_clk:0
-		ff_slp_btn:0
-		gpe00:0
-		gpe01:0
-		gpe02:0
-		gpe03:0
-		gpe04:0
-		gpe05:0
-		gpe06:0
-		gpe07:0
-		gpe08:0
-		gpe09:174
-		gpe0A:0
-		gpe0B:0
-		gpe0C:0
-		gpe0D:0
-		gpe0E:0
-		gpe0F:0
-		gpe10:0
-		gpe11:60
-		gpe12:0
-		gpe13:0
-		gpe14:0
-		gpe15:0
-		gpe16:0
-		gpe17:0
-		gpe18:0
-		gpe19:7
-		gpe1A:0
-		gpe1B:0
-		gpe1C:0
-		gpe1D:0
-		gpe1E:0
-		gpe1F:0
-		gpe_all:241
-		sci:241
+		error:	     0
+		ff_gbl_lock:	   0   enable
+		ff_pmtimer:	  0  invalid
+		ff_pwr_btn:	  0   enable
+		ff_rt_clk:	 2  disable
+		ff_slp_btn:	  0  invalid
+		gpe00:	     0	invalid
+		gpe01:	     0	 enable
+		gpe02:	   108	 enable
+		gpe03:	     0	invalid
+		gpe04:	     0	invalid
+		gpe05:	     0	invalid
+		gpe06:	     0	 enable
+		gpe07:	     0	 enable
+		gpe08:	     0	invalid
+		gpe09:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0A:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0B:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0C:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0D:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0E:	     0	invalid
+		gpe0F:	     0	invalid
+		gpe10:	     0	invalid
+		gpe11:	     0	invalid
+		gpe12:	     0	invalid
+		gpe13:	     0	invalid
+		gpe14:	     0	invalid
+		gpe15:	     0	invalid
+		gpe16:	     0	invalid
+		gpe17:	  1084	 enable
+		gpe18:	     0	 enable
+		gpe19:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1A:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1B:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1C:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1D:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1E:	     0	invalid
+		gpe1F:	     0	invalid
+		gpe_all:    1192
+		sci:	1194
 
 		sci - The total number of times the ACPI SCI
 		has claimed an interrupt.
@@ -89,6 +89,13 @@ Description:
 
 		error - an interrupt that can't be accounted for above.
 
+		invalid: it's either a wakeup GPE or a GPE/Fixed Event that
+			doesn't have an event handler.
+
+		disable: the GPE/Fixed Event is valid but disabled.
+
+		enable: the GPE/Fixed Event is valid and enabled.
+
 		Root has permission to clear any of these counters.  Eg.
 		# echo 0 > gpe11
 
@@ -97,3 +104,43 @@ Description:
 
 		None of these counters has an effect on the function
 		of the system, they are simply statistics.
+
+		Besides this, user can also write specific strings to these files
+		to enable/disable/clear ACPI interrupts in user space, which can be
+		used to debug some ACPI interrupt storm issues.
+
+		Note that only writting to VALID GPE/Fixed Event is allowed,
+		i.e. user can only change the status of runtime GPE and
+		Fixed Event with event handler installed.
+
+		Let's take power button fixed event for example, please kill acpid
+		and other user space applications so that the machine won't shutdown
+		when pressing the power button.
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		0
+		# press the power button for 3 times;
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		3
+		# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		disable
+		# press the power button for 3 times;
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		disable
+		# echo enable > ff_pwr_btn
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		4
+		/*
+		 * this is because the status bit is set even if the enable bit is cleared,
+		 * and it triggers an ACPI fixed event when the enable bit is set again
+		 */
+		# press the power button for 3 times;
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		7
+		# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
+		# press the power button for 3 times;
+		# echo clear > ff_pwr_btn	/* clear the status bit */
+		# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
+		# cat ff_pwr_btn
+		7
+

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-memmap

@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+What:		/sys/firmware/memmap/
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Bernhard Walle <bwalle@suse.de>
+Description:
+		On all platforms, the firmware provides a memory map which the
+		kernel reads. The resources from that memory map are registered
+		in the kernel resource tree and exposed to userspace via
+		/proc/iomem (together with other resources).
+
+		However, on most architectures that firmware-provided memory
+		map is modified afterwards by the kernel itself, either because
+		the kernel merges that memory map with other information or
+		just because the user overwrites that memory map via command
+		line.
+
+		kexec needs the raw firmware-provided memory map to setup the
+		parameter segment of the kernel that should be booted with
+		kexec. Also, the raw memory map is useful for debugging. For
+		that reason, /sys/firmware/memmap is an interface that provides
+		the raw memory map to userspace.
+
+		The structure is as follows: Under /sys/firmware/memmap there
+		are subdirectories with the number of the entry as their name:
+
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/0
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/1
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/2
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/3
+			...
+
+		The maximum depends on the number of memory map entries provided
+		by the firmware. The order is just the order that the firmware
+		provides.
+
+		Each directory contains three files:
+
+		start	: The start address (as hexadecimal number with the
+			  '0x' prefix).
+		end	: The end address, inclusive (regardless whether the
+			  firmware provides inclusive or exclusive ranges).
+		type	: Type of the entry as string. See below for a list of
+			  valid types.
+
+		So, for example:
+
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/0/start
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/0/end
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/0/type
+			/sys/firmware/memmap/1/start
+			...
+
+		Currently following types exist:
+
+		  - System RAM
+		  - ACPI Tables
+		  - ACPI Non-volatile Storage
+		  - reserved
+
+		Following shell snippet can be used to display that memory
+		map in a human-readable format:
+
+		-------------------- 8< ----------------------------------------
+		  #!/bin/bash
+		  cd /sys/firmware/memmap
+		  for dir in * ; do
+		      start=$(cat $dir/start)
+		      end=$(cat $dir/end)
+		      type=$(cat $dir/type)
+		      printf "%016x-%016x (%s)\n" $start $[ $end +1] "$type"
+		  done
+		-------------------- >8 ----------------------------------------

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm
+Date:		July 2008
+Contact:	Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, VM maintainers
+Description:
+		/sys/kernel/mm/ should contain any and all VM
+		related information in /sys/kernel/.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/
+Date:		June 2008
+Contact:	Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, hugetlb maintainers
+Description:
+		/sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/ contains a number of subdirectories
+		of the form hugepages-<size>kB, where <size> is the page size
+		of the hugepages supported by the kernel/CPU combination.
+
+		Under these directories are a number of files:
+			nr_hugepages
+			nr_overcommit_hugepages
+			free_hugepages
+			surplus_hugepages
+			resv_hugepages
+		See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt for details.

Documentation/CodingStyle

@@ -474,25 +474,29 @@ make a good program).
 So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner
 values.  To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
 
-(defun linux-c-mode ()
-  "C mode with adjusted defaults for use with the Linux kernel."
-  (interactive)
-  (c-mode)
-  (c-set-style "K&R")
-  (setq tab-width 8)
-  (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-  (setq c-basic-offset 8))
-
-This will define the M-x linux-c-mode command.  When hacking on a
-module, if you put the string -*- linux-c -*- somewhere on the first
-two lines, this mode will be automatically invoked. Also, you may want
-to add
-
-(setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("/usr/src/linux.*/.*\\.[ch]$" . linux-c-mode)
-			auto-mode-alist))
-
-to your .emacs file if you want to have linux-c-mode switched on
-automagically when you edit source files under /usr/src/linux.
+(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
+  "Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
+  (let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
+	 (column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
+	 (offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
+	 (steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
+    (* (max steps 1)
+       c-basic-offset)))
+
+(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
+          (lambda ()
+            (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
+              ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
+              (when (and filename
+                         (string-match "~/src/linux-trees" filename))
+                (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
+                (c-set-style "linux")
+                (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
+                              '(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
+                                c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
+
+This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
+files below ~/src/linux-trees.
 
 But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not
 everything is lost: use "indent".

Documentation/DMA-API.txt

@@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
 cache width is.
 
 int
-dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr)
+dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
 
 int
-pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr)
+pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
 
 In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create
 a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned

Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt

@@ -22,3 +22,12 @@ ready and available in memory.  The DMA of the "completion indication"
 could race with data DMA.  Mapping the memory used for completion
 indications with DMA_ATTR_WRITE_BARRIER would prevent the race.
 
+DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING
+----------------------
+
+DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING specifies that reads and writes to the mapping
+may be weakly ordered, that is that reads and writes may pass each other.
+
+Since it is optional for platforms to implement DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING,
+those that do not will simply ignore the attribute and exhibit default
+behavior.

Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl

@@ -524,6 +524,44 @@ These utilities include endpoint autoconfiguration.
 <!-- !Edrivers/usb/gadget/epautoconf.c -->
 </sect1>
 
+<sect1 id="composite"><title>Composite Device Framework</title>
+
+<para>The core API is sufficient for writing drivers for composite
+USB devices (with more than one function in a given configuration),
+and also multi-configuration devices (also more than one function,
+but not necessarily sharing a given configuration).
+There is however an optional framework which makes it easier to
+reuse and combine functions.
+</para>
+
+<para>Devices using this framework provide a <emphasis>struct
+usb_composite_driver</emphasis>, which in turn provides one or
+more <emphasis>struct usb_configuration</emphasis> instances.
+Each such configuration includes at least one
+<emphasis>struct usb_function</emphasis>, which packages a user
+visible role such as "network link" or "mass storage device".
+Management functions may also exist, such as "Device Firmware
+Upgrade".
+</para>
+
+!Iinclude/linux/usb/composite.h
+!Edrivers/usb/gadget/composite.c
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="functions"><title>Composite Device Functions</title>
+
+<para>At this writing, a few of the current gadget drivers have
+been converted to this framework.
+Near-term plans include converting all of them, except for "gadgetfs".
+</para>
+
+!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_acm.c
+!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_serial.c
+
+</sect1>
+
+
 </chapter>
 
 <chapter id="controllers"><title>Peripheral Controller Drivers</title>

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl

@@ -219,10 +219,10 @@
    </para>
 
    <sect1 id="lock-intro">
-   <title>Three Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks, Mutexes and Semaphores</title>
+   <title>Two Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks and Mutexes</title>
 
    <para>
-     There are three main types of kernel locks.  The fundamental type
+     There are two main types of kernel locks.  The fundamental type
      is the spinlock 
      (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>),
      which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the 
@@ -239,14 +239,6 @@
      can't sleep (see <xref linkend="sleeping-things"/>), and so have to
      use a spinlock instead.
    </para>
-   <para>
-     The third type is a semaphore
-     (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/semaphore.h</filename>): it
-     can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at
-     initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a
-     single-holder lock (a mutex).  If you can't get a semaphore, your
-     task will be suspended and later on woken up - just like for mutexes.
-   </para>
    <para>
      Neither type of lock is recursive: see
      <xref linkend="deadlock"/>.
@@ -278,7 +270,7 @@
     </para>
 
     <para>
-      Semaphores still exist, because they are required for
+      Mutexes still exist, because they are required for
       synchronization between <firstterm linkend="gloss-usercontext">user 
       contexts</firstterm>, as we will see below.
     </para>
@@ -289,18 +281,17 @@
 
      <para>
        If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from
-       user context, then you can use a simple semaphore
-       (<filename>linux/linux/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it.  This
-       is the most trivial case: you initialize the semaphore to the number 
-       of resources available (usually 1), and call
-       <function>down_interruptible()</function> to grab the semaphore, and 
-       <function>up()</function> to release it.  There is also a 
-       <function>down()</function>, which should be avoided, because it 
+       user context, then you can use a simple mutex
+       (<filename>include/linux/mutex.h</filename>) to protect it.  This
+       is the most trivial case: you initialize the mutex.  Then you can
+       call <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> to grab the mutex,
+       and <function>mutex_unlock()</function> to release it.  There is also a 
+       <function>mutex_lock()</function>, which should be avoided, because it 
        will not return if a signal is received.
      </para>
 
      <para>
-       Example: <filename>linux/net/core/netfilter.c</filename> allows 
+       Example: <filename>net/netfilter/nf_sockopt.c</filename> allows 
        registration of new <function>setsockopt()</function> and 
        <function>getsockopt()</function> calls, with
        <function>nf_register_sockopt()</function>.  Registration and 
@@ -515,7 +506,7 @@
       <listitem>
 	<para>
           If you are in a process context (any syscall) and want to
-	lock other process out, use a semaphore.  You can take a semaphore
+	lock other process out, use a mutex.  You can take a mutex
 	and sleep (<function>copy_from_user*(</function> or
 	<function>kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)</function>).
       </para>
@@ -662,7 +653,7 @@
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
-<entry>DI</entry>
+<entry>MLI</entry>
 <entry>None</entry>
 </row>
 
@@ -692,8 +683,8 @@
 <entry>spin_lock_bh</entry>
 </row>
 <row>
-<entry>DI</entry>
-<entry>down_interruptible</entry>
+<entry>MLI</entry>
+<entry>mutex_lock_interruptible</entry>
 </row>
 
 </tbody>
@@ -1310,7 +1301,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
     <para>
       There is a coding bug where a piece of code tries to grab a
       spinlock twice: it will spin forever, waiting for the lock to
-      be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and semaphores are not
+      be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and mutexes are not
       recursive in Linux).  This is trivial to diagnose: not a
       stay-up-five-nights-talk-to-fluffy-code-bunnies kind of
       problem.
@@ -1335,7 +1326,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
 
     <para>
       This complete lockup is easy to diagnose: on SMP boxes the
-      watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCKS</symbol> set
+      watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCK</symbol> set
       (<filename>include/linux/spinlock.h</filename>) will show this up 
       immediately when it happens.
     </para>
@@ -1558,7 +1549,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
    <title>Read/Write Lock Variants</title>
 
    <para>
-      Both spinlocks and semaphores have read/write variants:
+      Both spinlocks and mutexes have read/write variants:
       <type>rwlock_t</type> and <structname>struct rw_semaphore</structname>.
       These divide users into two classes: the readers and the writers.  If
       you are only reading the data, you can get a read lock, but to write to
@@ -1681,7 +1672,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
  #include &lt;linux/slab.h&gt;
  #include &lt;linux/string.h&gt;
 +#include &lt;linux/rcupdate.h&gt;
- #include &lt;linux/semaphore.h&gt;
+ #include &lt;linux/mutex.h&gt;
  #include &lt;asm/errno.h&gt;
 
  struct object
@@ -1913,7 +1904,7 @@ machines due to caching.
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
         <para>
-          <function> put_user()</function>
+          <function>put_user()</function>
         </para>
        </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
@@ -1927,13 +1918,13 @@ machines due to caching.
 
      <listitem>
       <para>
-      <function>down_interruptible()</function> and
-      <function>down()</function>
+      <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> and
+      <function>mutex_lock()</function>
       </para>
       <para>
-       There is a <function>down_trylock()</function> which can be
+       There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which can be
        used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep.
-       <function>up()</function> will also never sleep.
+       <function>mutex_unlock()</function> will also never sleep.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
@@ -2023,7 +2014,7 @@ machines due to caching.
       <para>
         Prior to 2.5, or when <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> is
         unset, processes in user context inside the kernel would not
-        preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you have it up,
+        preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you gave it up,
         except for interrupts).  With the addition of
         <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> in 2.5.4, this changed: when
         in user context, higher priority tasks can "cut in": spinlocks

Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl

@@ -84,10 +84,9 @@
     runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which contains
     the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage, uImage...).
     In gdb the developer specifies the connection parameters and
-    connects to kgdb.  Depending on which kgdb I/O modules exist in
-    the kernel for a given architecture, it may be possible to debug
-    the test machine's kernel with the development machine using a
-    rs232 or ethernet connection.
+    connects to kgdb.  The type of connection a developer makes with
+    gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O modules compiled as
+    builtin's or kernel modules in the test machine's kernel.
     </para>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
@@ -223,7 +222,7 @@
   </para>
   <para>
   IMPORTANT NOTE: Using this option with kgdb over the console
-  (kgdboc) or kgdb over ethernet (kgdboe) is not supported.
+  (kgdboc) is not supported.
   </para>
   </sect1>
   </chapter>
@@ -249,18 +248,11 @@
     (gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
     </programlisting>
     <para>
-    Example (kgdb to a terminal server):
+    Example (kgdb to a terminal server on tcp port 2012):
     </para>
     <programlisting>
     % gdb ./vmlinux
-    (gdb) target remote udp:192.168.2.2:6443
-    </programlisting>
-    <para>
-    Example (kgdb over ethernet):
-    </para>
-    <programlisting>
-    % gdb ./vmlinux
-    (gdb) target remote udp:192.168.2.2:6443
+    (gdb) target remote 192.168.2.2:2012
     </programlisting>
     <para>
     Once connected, you can debug a kernel the way you would debug an

Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl

@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@
 
     <revhistory>
       <revision>
-	<revnumber>1.0&nbsp;</revnumber>
+	<revnumber>1.0</revnumber>
 	<date>May 30, 2001</date>
 	<revremark>Initial revision posted to linux-kernel</revremark>
       </revision>
       <revision>
-	<revnumber>1.1&nbsp;</revnumber>
+	<revnumber>1.1</revnumber>
 	<date>June 3, 2001</date>
 	<revremark>Revised after comments from linux-kernel</revremark>
       </revision>

Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl

@@ -21,6 +21,18 @@
     </affiliation>
 </author>
 
+<copyright>
+	<year>2006-2008</year>
+	<holder>Hans-Jürgen Koch.</holder>
+</copyright>
+
+<legalnotice>
+<para>
+This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
+GPL version 2.
+</para>
+</legalnotice>
+
 <pubdate>2006-12-11</pubdate>
 
 <abstract>
@@ -29,6 +41,12 @@
 </abstract>
 
 <revhistory>
+	<revision>
+	<revnumber>0.5</revnumber>
+	<date>2008-05-22</date>
+	<authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added description of write() function.</revremark>
+	</revision>
 	<revision>
 	<revnumber>0.4</revnumber>
 	<date>2007-11-26</date>
@@ -57,20 +75,9 @@
 </bookinfo>
 
 <chapter id="aboutthisdoc">
-<?dbhtml filename="about.html"?>
+<?dbhtml filename="aboutthis.html"?>
 <title>About this document</title>
 
-<sect1 id="copyright">
-<?dbhtml filename="copyright.html"?>
-<title>Copyright and License</title>
-<para>
-      Copyright (c) 2006 by Hans-Jürgen Koch.</para>
-<para>
-This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
-GPL version 2.
-</para>
-</sect1>
-
 <sect1 id="translations">
 <?dbhtml filename="translations.html"?>
 <title>Translations</title>
@@ -189,6 +196,30 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
 	represents the total interrupt count. You can use this number
 	to figure out if you missed some interrupts.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+	For some hardware that has more than one interrupt source internally,
+	but not separate IRQ mask and status registers, there might be
+	situations where userspace cannot determine what the interrupt source
+	was if the kernel handler disables them by writing to the chip's IRQ
+	register. In such a case, the kernel has to disable the IRQ completely
+	to leave the chip's register untouched. Now the userspace part can
+	determine the cause of the interrupt, but it cannot re-enable
+	interrupts. Another cornercase is chips where re-enabling interrupts
+	is a read-modify-write operation to a combined IRQ status/acknowledge
+	register. This would be racy if a new interrupt occurred
+	simultaneously.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	To address these problems, UIO also implements a write() function. It
+	is normally not used and can be ignored for hardware that has only a
+	single interrupt source or has separate IRQ mask and status registers.
+	If you need it, however, a write to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>
+	will call the <function>irqcontrol()</function> function implemented
+	by the driver. You have to write a 32-bit value that is usually either
+	0 or 1 to disable or enable interrupts. If a driver does not implement
+	<function>irqcontrol()</function>, <function>write()</function> will
+	return with <varname>-ENOSYS</varname>.
+	</para>
 
 	<para>
 	To handle interrupts properly, your custom kernel module can
@@ -362,6 +393,14 @@ device is actually used.
 <function>open()</function>, you will probably also want a custom
 <function>release()</function> function.
 </para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>
+<varname>int (*irqcontrol)(struct uio_info *info, s32 irq_on)
+</varname>: Optional. If you need to be able to enable or disable
+interrupts from userspace by writing to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>,
+you can implement this function. The parameter <varname>irq_on</varname>
+will be 0 to disable interrupts and 1 to enable them.
+</para></listitem>
 </itemizedlist>
 
 <para>

Documentation/HOWTO

@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Here is a list of some of the different kernel trees available:
     - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
 	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
 
-    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
+    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com>
 	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
 
     - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Bug Reporting
 bugzilla.kernel.org is where the Linux kernel developers track kernel
 bugs.  Users are encouraged to report all bugs that they find in this
 tool.  For details on how to use the kernel bugzilla, please see:
-	http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html
+	http://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html
 
 The file REPORTING-BUGS in the main kernel source directory has a good
 template for how to report a possible kernel bug, and details what kind

Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt

@@ -1,17 +1,26 @@
+ChangeLog:
+	Started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
+	Update by Max Krasnyansky <maxk@qualcomm.com>
 
-SMP IRQ affinity, started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
-
+SMP IRQ affinity
 
 /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity specifies which target CPUs are permitted
 for a given IRQ source. It's a bitmask of allowed CPUs. It's not allowed
 to turn off all CPUs, and if an IRQ controller does not support IRQ
 affinity then the value will not change from the default 0xffffffff.
 
+/proc/irq/default_smp_affinity specifies default affinity mask that applies
+to all non-active IRQs. Once IRQ is allocated/activated its affinity bitmask
+will be set to the default mask. It can then be changed as described above.
+Default mask is 0xffffffff.
+
 Here is an example of restricting IRQ44 (eth1) to CPU0-3 then restricting
-the IRQ to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box):
+it to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box):
 
+[root@moon 44]# cd /proc/irq/44
 [root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
 ffffffff
+
 [root@moon 44]# echo 0f > smp_affinity
 [root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
 0000000f
@@ -21,17 +30,27 @@ PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
 --- hell ping statistics ---
 6029 packets transmitted, 6027 packets received, 0% packet loss
 round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.4 ms
-[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 44:
- 44:          0       1785       1785       1783       1783          1
-1          0   IO-APIC-level  eth1
+[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 'CPU\|44:'
+           CPU0       CPU1       CPU2       CPU3      CPU4       CPU5        CPU6       CPU7
+ 44:       1068       1785       1785       1783         0          0           0         0    IO-APIC-level  eth1
+
+As can be seen from the line above IRQ44 was delivered only to the first four
+processors (0-3).
+Now lets restrict that IRQ to CPU(4-7).
+
 [root@moon 44]# echo f0 > smp_affinity
+[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
+000000f0
 [root@moon 44]# ping -f h
 PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
 ..
 --- hell ping statistics ---
 2779 packets transmitted, 2777 packets received, 0% packet loss
 round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms
-[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 44:
- 44:       1068       1785       1785       1784       1784       1069       1070       1069   IO-APIC-level  eth1
-[root@moon 44]#
+[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts |  'CPU\|44:'
+           CPU0       CPU1       CPU2       CPU3      CPU4       CPU5        CPU6       CPU7
+ 44:       1068       1785       1785       1783      1784       1069        1070       1069   IO-APIC-level  eth1
+
+This time around IRQ44 was delivered only to the last four processors.
+i.e counters for the CPU0-3 did not change.
 

Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt

@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ IOVA generation is pretty generic. We used the same technique as vmalloc()
 but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain.
 Different DMA engines may support different number of domains.
 
-We also allocate gaurd pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch
+We also allocate guard pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch
 any overflow that might happen.
 
 
@@ -112,4 +112,4 @@ TBD
 
 - For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just
   provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices.
-- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionlity for VMM folks.
+- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionality for VMM folks.

Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt

@@ -93,6 +93,9 @@ Since NMI handlers disable preemption, synchronize_sched() is guaranteed
 not to return until all ongoing NMI handlers exit.  It is therefore safe
 to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_sched() returns.
 
+Important note: for this to work, the architecture in question must
+invoke irq_enter() and irq_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively.
+
 
 Answer to Quick Quiz
 

Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt

@@ -52,6 +52,10 @@ of each iteration.  Unfortunately, chaotic relaxation requires highly
 structured data, such as the matrices used in scientific programs, and
 is thus inapplicable to most data structures in operating-system kernels.
 
+In 1992, Henry (now Alexia) Massalin completed a dissertation advising
+parallel programmers to defer processing when feasible to simplify
+synchronization.  RCU makes extremely heavy use of this advice.
+
 In 1993, Jacobson [Jacobson93] verbally described what is perhaps the
 simplest deferred-free technique: simply waiting a fixed amount of time
 before freeing blocks awaiting deferred free.  Jacobson did not describe
@@ -138,6 +142,13 @@ blocking in read-side critical sections appeared [PaulEMcKenney2006c],
 Robert Olsson described an RCU-protected trie-hash combination
 [RobertOlsson2006a].
 
+2007 saw the journal version of the award-winning RCU paper from 2006
+[ThomasEHart2007a], as well as a paper demonstrating use of Promela
+and Spin to mechanically verify an optimization to Oleg Nesterov's
+QRCU [PaulEMcKenney2007QRCUspin], a design document describing
+preemptible RCU [PaulEMcKenney2007PreemptibleRCU], and the three-part
+LWN "What is RCU?" series [PaulEMcKenney2007WhatIsRCUFundamentally,
+PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUUsage, and PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUAPI].
 
 Bibtex Entries
 
@@ -202,6 +213,20 @@ Bibtex Entries
 ,Year="1991"
 }
 
+@phdthesis{HMassalinPhD
+,author="H. Massalin"
+,title="Synthesis: An Efficient Implementation of Fundamental Operating
+System Services"
+,school="Columbia University"
+,address="New York, NY"
+,year="1992"
+,annotation="
+	Mondo optimizing compiler.
+	Wait-free stuff.
+	Good advice: defer work to avoid synchronization.
+"
+}
+
 @unpublished{Jacobson93
 ,author="Van Jacobson"
 ,title="Avoid Read-Side Locking Via Delayed Free"
@@ -635,3 +660,86 @@ Revised:
 "
 }
 
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007PreemptibleRCU
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
+,Title="The design of preemptible read-copy-update"
+,month="October"
+,day="8"
+,year="2007"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/253651/}
+[Viewed October 25, 2007]"
+,annotation="
+	LWN article describing the design of preemptible RCU.
+"
+}
+
+########################################################################
+#
+#	"What is RCU?" LWN series.
+#
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007WhatIsRCUFundamentally
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney and Jonathan Walpole"
+,Title="What is {RCU}, Fundamentally?"
+,month="December"
+,day="17"
+,year="2007"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/262464/}
+[Viewed December 27, 2007]"
+,annotation="
+	Lays out the three basic components of RCU: (1) publish-subscribe,
+	(2) wait for pre-existing readers to complete, and (2) maintain
+	multiple versions.
+"
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUUsage
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
+,Title="What is {RCU}? Part 2: Usage"
+,month="January"
+,day="4"
+,year="2008"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/263130/}
+[Viewed January 4, 2008]"
+,annotation="
+	Lays out six uses of RCU:
+	1. RCU is a Reader-Writer Lock Replacement
+	2. RCU is a Restricted Reference-Counting Mechanism
+	3. RCU is a Bulk Reference-Counting Mechanism
+	4. RCU is a Poor Man's Garbage Collector
+	5. RCU is a Way of Providing Existence Guarantees
+	6. RCU is a Way of Waiting for Things to Finish 
+"
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUAPI
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
+,Title="{RCU} part 3: the {RCU} {API}"
+,month="January"
+,day="17"
+,year="2008"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/264090/}
+[Viewed January 10, 2008]"
+,annotation="
+	Gives an overview of the Linux-kernel RCU API and a brief annotated RCU
+	bibliography.
+"
+}
+
+@article{DinakarGuniguntala2008IBMSysJ
+,author="D. Guniguntala and P. E. McKenney and J. Triplett and J. Walpole"
+,title="The read-copy-update mechanism for supporting real-time applications on shared-memory multiprocessor systems with {Linux}"
+,Year="2008"
+,Month="April"
+,journal="IBM Systems Journal"
+,volume="47"
+,number="2"
+,pages="@@-@@"
+,annotation="
+	RCU, realtime RCU, sleepable RCU, performance.
+"
+}

Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt

@@ -13,10 +13,13 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	detailed performance measurements show that RCU is nonetheless
 	the right tool for the job.
 
-	The other exception would be where performance is not an issue,
-	and RCU provides a simpler implementation.  An example of this
-	situation is the dynamic NMI code in the Linux 2.6 kernel,
-	at least on architectures where NMIs are rare.
+	Another exception is where performance is not an issue, and RCU
+	provides a simpler implementation.  An example of this situation
+	is the dynamic NMI code in the Linux 2.6 kernel, at least on
+	architectures where NMIs are rare.
+
+	Yet another exception is where the low real-time latency of RCU's
+	read-side primitives is critically important.
 
 1.	Does the update code have proper mutual exclusion?
 
@@ -39,9 +42,10 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 
 2.	Do the RCU read-side critical sections make proper use of
 	rcu_read_lock() and friends?  These primitives are needed
-	to suppress preemption (or bottom halves, in the case of
-	rcu_read_lock_bh()) in the read-side critical sections,
-	and are also an excellent aid to readability.
+	to prevent grace periods from ending prematurely, which
+	could result in data being unceremoniously freed out from
+	under your read-side code, which can greatly increase the
+	actuarial risk of your kernel.
 
 	As a rough rule of thumb, any dereference of an RCU-protected
 	pointer must be covered by rcu_read_lock() or rcu_read_lock_bh()
@@ -54,15 +58,30 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	be running while updates are in progress.  There are a number
 	of ways to handle this concurrency, depending on the situation:
 
-	a.	Make updates appear atomic to readers.  For example,
+	a.	Use the RCU variants of the list and hlist update
+		primitives to add, remove, and replace elements on an
+		RCU-protected list.  Alternatively, use the RCU-protected
+		trees that have been added to the Linux kernel.
+
+		This is almost always the best approach.
+
+	b.	Proceed as in (a) above, but also maintain per-element
+		locks (that are acquired by both readers and writers)
+		that guard per-element state.  Of course, fields that
+		the readers refrain from accessing can be guarded by the
+		update-side lock.
+
+		This works quite well, also.
+
+	c.	Make updates appear atomic to readers.  For example,
 		pointer updates to properly aligned fields will appear
 		atomic, as will individual atomic primitives.  Operations
 		performed under a lock and sequences of multiple atomic
 		primitives will -not- appear to be atomic.
 
-		This is almost always the best approach.
+		This can work, but is starting to get a bit tricky.
 
-	b.	Carefully order the updates and the reads so that
+	d.	Carefully order the updates and the reads so that
 		readers see valid data at all phases of the update.
 		This is often more difficult than it sounds, especially
 		given modern CPUs' tendency to reorder memory references.
@@ -123,18 +142,22 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 		when publicizing a pointer to a structure that can
 		be traversed by an RCU read-side critical section.
 
-5.	If call_rcu(), or a related primitive such as call_rcu_bh(),
-	is used, the callback function must be written to be called
-	from softirq context.  In particular, it cannot block.
+5.	If call_rcu(), or a related primitive such as call_rcu_bh() or
+	call_rcu_sched(), is used, the callback function must be
+	written to be called from softirq context.  In particular,
+	it cannot block.
 
 6.	Since synchronize_rcu() can block, it cannot be called from
-	any sort of irq context.
+	any sort of irq context.  Ditto for synchronize_sched() and
+	synchronize_srcu().
 
 7.	If the updater uses call_rcu(), then the corresponding readers
 	must use rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock().  If the updater
 	uses call_rcu_bh(), then the corresponding readers must use
-	rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh().  Mixing things up
-	will result in confusion and broken kernels.
+	rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh().  If the updater
+	uses call_rcu_sched(), then the corresponding readers must
+	disable preemption.  Mixing things up will result in confusion
+	and broken kernels.
 
 	One exception to this rule: rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock()
 	may be substituted for rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh()
@@ -143,9 +166,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	such cases is a must, of course!  And the jury is still out on
 	whether the increased speed is worth it.
 
-8.	Although synchronize_rcu() is a bit slower than is call_rcu(),
-	it usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update
-	performance is critically important or the updaters cannot block,
+8.	Although synchronize_rcu() is slower than is call_rcu(), it
+	usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update performance
+	is critically important or the updaters cannot block,
 	synchronize_rcu() should be used in preference to call_rcu().
 
 	An especially important property of the synchronize_rcu()
@@ -187,23 +210,23 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 		number of updates per grace period.
 
 9.	All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
-	list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
+	rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
 	list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(),
-	must be within an RCU read-side critical section.  RCU
+	must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or
+	must be protected by appropriate update-side locks.  RCU
 	read-side critical sections are delimited by rcu_read_lock()
 	and rcu_read_unlock(), or by similar primitives such as
 	rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh().
 
-	Use of the _rcu() list-traversal primitives outside of an
-	RCU read-side critical section causes no harm other than
-	a slight performance degradation on Alpha CPUs.  It can
-	also be quite helpful in reducing code bloat when common
-	code is shared between readers and updaters.
+	The reason that it is permissible to use RCU list-traversal
+	primitives when the update-side lock is held is that doing so
+	can be quite helpful in reducing code bloat when common code is
+	shared between readers and updaters.
 
 10.	Conversely, if you are in an RCU read-side critical section,
-	you -must- use the "_rcu()" variants of the list macros.
-	Failing to do so will break Alpha and confuse people reading
-	your code.
+	and you don't hold the appropriate update-side lock, you -must-
+	use the "_rcu()" variants of the list macros.  Failing to do so
+	will break Alpha and confuse people reading your code.
 
 11.	Note that synchronize_rcu() -only- guarantees to wait until
 	all currently executing rcu_read_lock()-protected RCU read-side
@@ -230,6 +253,14 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	must use whatever locking or other synchronization is required
 	to safely access and/or modify that data structure.
 
+	RCU callbacks are -usually- executed on the same CPU that executed
+	the corresponding call_rcu(), call_rcu_bh(), or call_rcu_sched(),
+	but are by -no- means guaranteed to be.  For example, if a given
+	CPU goes offline while having an RCU callback pending, then that
+	RCU callback will execute on some surviving CPU.  (If this was
+	not the case, a self-spawning RCU callback would prevent the
+	victim CPU from ever going offline.)
+
 14.	SRCU (srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock(), and synchronize_srcu())
 	may only be invoked from process context.  Unlike other forms of
 	RCU, it -is- permissible to block in an SRCU read-side critical

Documentation/RCU/torture.txt

@@ -10,23 +10,30 @@ status messages via printk(), which can be examined via the dmesg
 command (perhaps grepping for "torture").  The test is started
 when the module is loaded, and stops when the module is unloaded.
 
-However, actually setting this config option to "y" results in the system
-running the test immediately upon boot, and ending only when the system
-is taken down.  Normally, one will instead want to build the system
-with CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST=m and to use modprobe and rmmod to control
-the test, perhaps using a script similar to the one shown at the end of
-this document.  Note that you will need CONFIG_MODULE_UNLOAD in order
-to be able to end the test.
+CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST_RUNNABLE
+
+It is also possible to specify CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST=y, which will
+result in the tests being loaded into the base kernel.  In this case,
+the CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST_RUNNABLE config option is used to specify
+whether the RCU torture tests are to be started immediately during
+boot or whether the /proc/sys/kernel/rcutorture_runnable file is used
+to enable them.  This /proc file can be used to repeatedly pause and
+restart the tests, regardless of the initial state specified by the
+CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST_RUNNABLE config option.
+
+You will normally -not- want to start the RCU torture tests during boot
+(and thus the default is CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST_RUNNABLE=n), but doing
+this can sometimes be useful in finding boot-time bugs.
 
 
 MODULE PARAMETERS
 
 This module has the following parameters:
 
-nreaders	This is the number of RCU reading threads supported.
-		The default is twice the number of CPUs.  Why twice?
-		To properly exercise RCU implementations with preemptible
-		read-side critical sections.
+irqreaders	Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level.  This is currently
+		done via timers.  Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that
+		permit this.  (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do
+		-not- permit this know to ignore this variable.)
 
 nfakewriters	This is the number of RCU fake writer threads to run.  Fake
 		writer threads repeatedly use the synchronous "wait for
@@ -37,6 +44,16 @@ nfakewriters	This is the number of RCU fake writer threads to run.  Fake
 		to trigger special cases caused by multiple writers, such as
 		the synchronize_srcu() early return optimization.
 
+nreaders	This is the number of RCU reading threads supported.
+		The default is twice the number of CPUs.  Why twice?
+		To properly exercise RCU implementations with preemptible
+		read-side critical sections.
+
+shuffle_interval
+		The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
+		to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 3 seconds.
+		Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz.
+
 stat_interval	The number of seconds between output of torture
 		statistics (via printk()).  Regardless of the interval,
 		statistics are printed when the module is unloaded.
@@ -44,10 +61,11 @@ stat_interval	The number of seconds between output of torture
 		be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this
 		is the default.
 
-shuffle_interval
-		The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
-		to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 5 seconds.
-		Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz.
+stutter		The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
+		same period of time.  Defaults to "stutter=5", so as
+		to run and pause for (roughly) five-second intervals.
+		Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously
+		without pausing, which is the old default behavior.
 
 test_no_idle_hz	Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in
 		a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to

Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt

@@ -1,3 +1,11 @@
+Please note that the "What is RCU?" LWN series is an excellent place
+to start learning about RCU:
+
+1.	What is RCU, Fundamentally?  http://lwn.net/Articles/262464/
+2.	What is RCU? Part 2: Usage   http://lwn.net/Articles/263130/
+3.	RCU part 3: the RCU API      http://lwn.net/Articles/264090/
+
+
 What is RCU?
 
 RCU is a synchronization mechanism that was added to the Linux kernel
@@ -772,26 +780,18 @@ Linux-kernel source code, but it helps to have a full list of the
 APIs, since there does not appear to be a way to categorize them
 in docbook.  Here is the list, by category.
 
-Markers for RCU read-side critical sections:
-
-	rcu_read_lock
-	rcu_read_unlock
-	rcu_read_lock_bh
-	rcu_read_unlock_bh
-	srcu_read_lock
-	srcu_read_unlock
-
 RCU pointer/list traversal:
 
 	rcu_dereference
+	list_for_each_entry_rcu
+	hlist_for_each_entry_rcu
+
 	list_for_each_rcu		(to be deprecated in favor of
 					 list_for_each_entry_rcu)
-	list_for_each_entry_rcu
 	list_for_each_continue_rcu	(to be deprecated in favor of new
 					 list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu)
-	hlist_for_each_entry_rcu
 
-RCU pointer update:
+RCU pointer/list update:
 
 	rcu_assign_pointer
 	list_add_rcu
@@ -799,16 +799,36 @@ RCU pointer update:
 	list_del_rcu
 	list_replace_rcu
 	hlist_del_rcu
+	hlist_add_after_rcu
+	hlist_add_before_rcu
 	hlist_add_head_rcu
+	hlist_replace_rcu
+	list_splice_init_rcu()
 
-RCU grace period:
+RCU:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
+
+	rcu_read_lock		synchronize_net		rcu_barrier
+	rcu_read_unlock		synchronize_rcu
+				call_rcu
+
+
+bh:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
+
+	rcu_read_lock_bh	call_rcu_bh		rcu_barrier_bh
+	rcu_read_unlock_bh
+
+
+sched:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
+
+	[preempt_disable]	synchronize_sched	rcu_barrier_sched
+	[and friends]		call_rcu_sched
+
+
+SRCU:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
+
+	srcu_read_lock		synchronize_srcu	N/A
+	srcu_read_unlock
 
-	synchronize_net
-	synchronize_sched
-	synchronize_rcu
-	synchronize_srcu
-	call_rcu
-	call_rcu_bh
 
 See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated
 from them) for more information.

Documentation/SubmittingPatches

@@ -528,7 +528,33 @@ See more details on the proper patch format in the following
 references.
 
 
+16) Sending "git pull" requests  (from Linus emails)
 
+Please write the git repo address and branch name alone on the same line
+so that I can't even by mistake pull from the wrong branch, and so
+that a triple-click just selects the whole thing.
+
+So the proper format is something along the lines of:
+
+	"Please pull from
+
+		git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus
+
+	 to get these changes:"
+
+so that I don't have to hunt-and-peck for the address and inevitably
+get it wrong (actually, I've only gotten it wrong a few times, and
+checking against the diffstat tells me when I get it wrong, but I'm
+just a lot more comfortable when I don't have to "look for" the right
+thing to pull, and double-check that I have the right branch-name).
+
+
+Please use "git diff -M --stat --summary" to generate the diffstat:
+the -M enables rename detection, and the summary enables a summary of
+new/deleted or renamed files.
+
+With rename detection, the statistics are rather different [...]
+because git will notice that a fair number of the changes are renames.
 
 -----------------------------------
 SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS

Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt

@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ the delays experienced by a task while
 a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable)
 b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task
 c) swapping in pages
+d) memory reclaim
 
 and makes these statistics available to userspace through
 the taskstats interface.
@@ -41,7 +42,7 @@ this structure. See
      include/linux/taskstats.h
 for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting.
 It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative
-delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin etc.
+delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin, memory reclaim etc.
 
 Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given
 counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay
@@ -94,7 +95,9 @@ CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
 	7876	92005750	100000000	24001500
 IO	count	delay total
 	0	0
-MEM	count	delay total
+SWAP	count	delay total
+	0	0
+RECLAIM	count	delay total
 	0	0
 
 Get delays seen in executing a given simple command
@@ -108,5 +111,7 @@ CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
 	6	4000250		4000000		0
 IO	count	delay total
 	0	0
-MEM	count	delay total
+SWAP	count	delay total
+	0	0
+RECLAIM	count	delay total
 	0	0

Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c

@@ -196,14 +196,18 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
 	       "      %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n"
 	       "IO    %15s%15s\n"
 	       "      %15llu%15llu\n"
-	       "MEM   %15s%15s\n"
+	       "SWAP  %15s%15s\n"
+	       "      %15llu%15llu\n"
+	       "RECLAIM  %12s%15s\n"
 	       "      %15llu%15llu\n",
 	       "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
 	       t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
 	       t->cpu_delay_total,
 	       "count", "delay total",
 	       t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total,
-	       "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total);
+	       "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total,
+	       "count", "delay total",
+	       t->freepages_count, t->freepages_delay_total);
 }
 
 void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)

Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields.
 There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
 
 1) Common and basic accounting fields
-    If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats inteface is enabled and
+    If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats interface is enabled and
     the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for
     delivery at do_exit() of a task.
 2) Delay accounting fields
@@ -24,6 +24,10 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
 
 4) Per-task and per-thread context switch count statistics
 
+5) Time accounting for SMT machines
+
+6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
+
 Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and
 should not change the relative position of each field within the struct.
 
@@ -164,4 +168,13 @@ struct taskstats {
 	__u64	nvcsw;			/* Context voluntary switch counter */
 	__u64	nivcsw;			/* Context involuntary switch counter */
 
+5) Time accounting for SMT machines
+	__u64	ac_utimescaled;		/* utime scaled on frequency etc */
+	__u64	ac_stimescaled;		/* stime scaled on frequency etc */
+	__u64	cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */
+
+6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
+	/* Delay waiting for memory reclaim */
+	__u64	freepages_count;
+	__u64	freepages_delay_total;
 }

Documentation/arm/Interrupts

@@ -138,14 +138,8 @@ So, what's changed?
 
                 Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level.  This replaces the
                 SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge()
-                function.  Type should be one of the following:
-
-                #define IRQT_NOEDGE     (0)
-                #define IRQT_RISING     (__IRQT_RISEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_FALLING    (__IRQT_FALEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_BOTHEDGE   (__IRQT_RISEDGE|__IRQT_FALEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_LOW        (__IRQT_LOWLVL)
-                #define IRQT_HIGH       (__IRQT_HIGHLVL)
+                function.  Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in
+		<linux/irq.h>
 
 3. set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() is obsolete, and should be replaced by set_irq_type.
 

Documentation/auxdisplay/cfag12864b

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 	===================================
 
 License:		GPLv2
-Author & Maintainer:	Miguel Ojeda Sandonis <maxextreme@gmail.com>
+Author & Maintainer:	Miguel Ojeda Sandonis
 Date:			2006-10-27
 
 
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Date:			2006-10-27
 1. DRIVER INFORMATION
 ---------------------
 
-This driver support one cfag12864b display at time.
+This driver supports a cfag12864b LCD.
 
 
 ---------------------

Documentation/auxdisplay/cfag12864b-example.c

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
  * Description: cfag12864b LCD userspace example program
  *     License: GPLv2
  *
- *      Author: Copyright (C) Miguel Ojeda Sandonis <maxextreme@gmail.com>
+ *      Author: Copyright (C) Miguel Ojeda Sandonis
  *        Date: 2006-10-31
  *
  *  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

Documentation/auxdisplay/ks0108

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 	==========================================
 
 License:		GPLv2
-Author & Maintainer:	Miguel Ojeda Sandonis <maxextreme@gmail.com>
+Author & Maintainer:	Miguel Ojeda Sandonis
 Date:			2006-10-27
 
 
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Date:			2006-10-27
 1. DRIVER INFORMATION
 ---------------------
 
-This driver support the ks0108 LCD controller.
+This driver supports the ks0108 LCD controller.
 
 
 ---------------------

Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,327 @@
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+1. INTRODUCTION
+
+Modern filesystems feature checksumming of data and metadata to
+protect against data corruption.  However, the detection of the
+corruption is done at read time which could potentially be months
+after the data was written.  At that point the original data that the
+application tried to write is most likely lost.
+
+The solution is to ensure that the disk is actually storing what the
+application meant it to.  Recent additions to both the SCSI family
+protocols (SBC Data Integrity Field, SCC protection proposal) as well
+as SATA/T13 (External Path Protection) try to remedy this by adding
+support for appending integrity metadata to an I/O.  The integrity
+metadata (or protection information in SCSI terminology) includes a
+checksum for each sector as well as an incrementing counter that
+ensures the individual sectors are written in the right order.  And
+for some protection schemes also that the I/O is written to the right
+place on disk.
+
+Current storage controllers and devices implement various protective
+measures, for instance checksumming and scrubbing.  But these
+technologies are working in their own isolated domains or at best
+between adjacent nodes in the I/O path.  The interesting thing about
+DIF and the other integrity extensions is that the protection format
+is well defined and every node in the I/O path can verify the
+integrity of the I/O and reject it if corruption is detected.  This
+allows not only corruption prevention but also isolation of the point
+of failure.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+2. THE DATA INTEGRITY EXTENSIONS
+
+As written, the protocol extensions only protect the path between
+controller and storage device.  However, many controllers actually
+allow the operating system to interact with the integrity metadata
+(IMD).  We have been working with several FC/SAS HBA vendors to enable
+the protection information to be transferred to and from their
+controllers.
+
+The SCSI Data Integrity Field works by appending 8 bytes of protection
+information to each sector.  The data + integrity metadata is stored
+in 520 byte sectors on disk.  Data + IMD are interleaved when
+transferred between the controller and target.  The T13 proposal is
+similar.
+
+Because it is highly inconvenient for operating systems to deal with
+520 (and 4104) byte sectors, we approached several HBA vendors and
+encouraged them to allow separation of the data and integrity metadata
+scatter-gather lists.
+
+The controller will interleave the buffers on write and split them on
+read.  This means that the Linux can DMA the data buffers to and from
+host memory without changes to the page cache.
+
+Also, the 16-bit CRC checksum mandated by both the SCSI and SATA specs
+is somewhat heavy to compute in software.  Benchmarks found that
+calculating this checksum had a significant impact on system
+performance for a number of workloads.  Some controllers allow a
+lighter-weight checksum to be used when interfacing with the operating
+system.  Emulex, for instance, supports the TCP/IP checksum instead.
+The IP checksum received from the OS is converted to the 16-bit CRC
+when writing and vice versa.  This allows the integrity metadata to be
+generated by Linux or the application at very low cost (comparable to
+software RAID5).
+
+The IP checksum is weaker than the CRC in terms of detecting bit
+errors.  However, the strength is really in the separation of the data
+buffers and the integrity metadata.  These two distinct buffers much
+match up for an I/O to complete.
+
+The separation of the data and integrity metadata buffers as well as
+the choice in checksums is referred to as the Data Integrity
+Extensions.  As these extensions are outside the scope of the protocol
+bodies (T10, T13), Oracle and its partners are trying to standardize
+them within the Storage Networking Industry Association.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+3. KERNEL CHANGES
+
+The data integrity framework in Linux enables protection information
+to be pinned to I/Os and sent to/received from controllers that
+support it.
+
+The advantage to the integrity extensions in SCSI and SATA is that
+they enable us to protect the entire path from application to storage
+device.  However, at the same time this is also the biggest
+disadvantage. It means that the protection information must be in a
+format that can be understood by the disk.
+
+Generally Linux/POSIX applications are agnostic to the intricacies of
+the storage devices they are accessing.  The virtual filesystem switch
+and the block layer make things like hardware sector size and
+transport protocols completely transparent to the application.
+
+However, this level of detail is required when preparing the
+protection information to send to a disk.  Consequently, the very
+concept of an end-to-end protection scheme is a layering violation.
+It is completely unreasonable for an application to be aware whether
+it is accessing a SCSI or SATA disk.
+
+The data integrity support implemented in Linux attempts to hide this
+from the application.  As far as the application (and to some extent
+the kernel) is concerned, the integrity metadata is opaque information
+that's attached to the I/O.
+
+The current implementation allows the block layer to automatically
+generate the protection information for any I/O.  Eventually the
+intent is to move the integrity metadata calculation to userspace for
+user data.  Metadata and other I/O that originates within the kernel
+will still use the automatic generation interface.
+
+Some storage devices allow each hardware sector to be tagged with a
+16-bit value.  The owner of this tag space is the owner of the block
+device.  I.e. the filesystem in most cases.  The filesystem can use
+this extra space to tag sectors as they see fit.  Because the tag
+space is limited, the block interface allows tagging bigger chunks by
+way of interleaving.  This way, 8*16 bits of information can be
+attached to a typical 4KB filesystem block.
+
+This also means that applications such as fsck and mkfs will need
+access to manipulate the tags from user space.  A passthrough
+interface for this is being worked on.
+
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+4. BLOCK LAYER IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS
+
+4.1 BIO
+
+The data integrity patches add a new field to struct bio when
+CONFIG_BLK_DEV_INTEGRITY is enabled.  bio->bi_integrity is a pointer
+to a struct bip which contains the bio integrity payload.  Essentially
+a bip is a trimmed down struct bio which holds a bio_vec containing
+the integrity metadata and the required housekeeping information (bvec
+pool, vector count, etc.)
+
+A kernel subsystem can enable data integrity protection on a bio by
+calling bio_integrity_alloc(bio).  This will allocate and attach the
+bip to the bio.
+
+Individual pages containing integrity metadata can subsequently be
+attached using bio_integrity_add_page().
+
+bio_free() will automatically free the bip.
+
+
+4.2 BLOCK DEVICE
+
+Because the format of the protection data is tied to the physical
+disk, each block device has been extended with a block integrity
+profile (struct blk_integrity).  This optional profile is registered
+with the block layer using blk_integrity_register().
+
+The profile contains callback functions for generating and verifying
+the protection data, as well as getting and setting application tags.
+The profile also contains a few constants to aid in completing,
+merging and splitting the integrity metadata.
+
+Layered block devices will need to pick a profile that's appropriate
+for all subdevices.  blk_integrity_compare() can help with that.  DM
+and MD linear, RAID0 and RAID1 are currently supported.  RAID4/5/6
+will require extra work due to the application tag.
+
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+5.0 BLOCK LAYER INTEGRITY API
+
+5.1 NORMAL FILESYSTEM
+
+    The normal filesystem is unaware that the underlying block device
+    is capable of sending/receiving integrity metadata.  The IMD will
+    be automatically generated by the block layer at submit_bio() time
+    in case of a WRITE.  A READ request will cause the I/O integrity
+    to be verified upon completion.
+
+    IMD generation and verification can be toggled using the
+
+      /sys/block/<bdev>/integrity/write_generate
+
+    and
+
+      /sys/block/<bdev>/integrity/read_verify
+
+    flags.
+
+
+5.2 INTEGRITY-AWARE FILESYSTEM
+
+    A filesystem that is integrity-aware can prepare I/Os with IMD
+    attached.  It can also use the application tag space if this is
+    supported by the block device.
+
+
+    int bdev_integrity_enabled(block_device, int rw);
+
+      bdev_integrity_enabled() will return 1 if the block device
+      supports integrity metadata transfer for the data direction
+      specified in 'rw'.
+
+      bdev_integrity_enabled() honors the write_generate and
+      read_verify flags in sysfs and will respond accordingly.
+
+
+    int bio_integrity_prep(bio);
+
+      To generate IMD for WRITE and to set up buffers for READ, the
+      filesystem must call bio_integrity_prep(bio).
+
+      Prior to calling this function, the bio data direction and start
+      sector must be set, and the bio should have all data pages
+      added.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the bio does not
+      change while I/O is in progress.
+
+      bio_integrity_prep() should only be called if
+      bio_integrity_enabled() returned 1.
+
+
+    int bio_integrity_tag_size(bio);
+
+      If the filesystem wants to use the application tag space it will
+      first have to find out how much storage space is available.
+      Because tag space is generally limited (usually 2 bytes per
+      sector regardless of sector size), the integrity framework
+      supports interleaving the information between the sectors in an
+      I/O.
+
+      Filesystems can call bio_integrity_tag_size(bio) to find out how
+      many bytes of storage are available for that particular bio.
+
+      Another option is bdev_get_tag_size(block_device) which will
+      return the number of available bytes per hardware sector.
+
+
+    int bio_integrity_set_tag(bio, void *tag_buf, len);
+
+      After a successful return from bio_integrity_prep(),
+      bio_integrity_set_tag() can be used to attach an opaque tag
+      buffer to a bio.  Obviously this only makes sense if the I/O is
+      a WRITE.
+
+
+    int bio_integrity_get_tag(bio, void *tag_buf, len);
+
+      Similarly, at READ I/O completion time the filesystem can
+      retrieve the tag buffer using bio_integrity_get_tag().
+
+
+6.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA
+
+    Filesystems that either generate their own integrity metadata or
+    are capable of transferring IMD from user space can use the
+    following calls:
+
+
+    struct bip * bio_integrity_alloc(bio, gfp_mask, nr_pages);
+
+      Allocates the bio integrity payload and hangs it off of the bio.
+      nr_pages indicate how many pages of protection data need to be
+      stored in the integrity bio_vec list (similar to bio_alloc()).
+
+      The integrity payload will be freed at bio_free() time.
+
+
+    int bio_integrity_add_page(bio, page, len, offset);
+
+      Attaches a page containing integrity metadata to an existing
+      bio.  The bio must have an existing bip,
+      i.e. bio_integrity_alloc() must have been called.  For a WRITE,
+      the integrity metadata in the pages must be in a format
+      understood by the target device with the notable exception that
+      the sector numbers will be remapped as the request traverses the
+      I/O stack.  This implies that the pages added using this call
+      will be modified during I/O!  The first reference tag in the
+      integrity metadata must have a value of bip->bip_sector.
+
+      Pages can be added using bio_integrity_add_page() as long as
+      there is room in the bip bio_vec array (nr_pages).
+
+      Upon completion of a READ operation, the attached pages will
+      contain the integrity metadata received from the storage device.
+      It is up to the receiver to process them and verify data
+      integrity upon completion.
+
+
+6.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY
+    METADATA
+
+    To enable integrity exchange on a block device the gendisk must be
+    registered as capable:
+
+    int blk_integrity_register(gendisk, blk_integrity);
+
+      The blk_integrity struct is a template and should contain the
+      following:
+
+        static struct blk_integrity my_profile = {
+            .name                   = "STANDARDSBODY-TYPE-VARIANT-CSUM",
+            .generate_fn            = my_generate_fn,
+       	    .verify_fn              = my_verify_fn,
+       	    .get_tag_fn             = my_get_tag_fn,
+       	    .set_tag_fn             = my_set_tag_fn,
+	    .tuple_size             = sizeof(struct my_tuple_size),
+	    .tag_size               = <tag bytes per hw sector>,
+        };
+
+      'name' is a text string which will be visible in sysfs.  This is
+      part of the userland API so chose it carefully and never change
+      it.  The format is standards body-type-variant.
+      E.g. T10-DIF-TYPE1-IP or T13-EPP-0-CRC.
+
+      'generate_fn' generates appropriate integrity metadata (for WRITE).
+
+      'verify_fn' verifies that the data buffer matches the integrity
+      metadata.
+
+      'tuple_size' must be set to match the size of the integrity
+      metadata per sector.  I.e. 8 for DIF and EPP.
+
+      'tag_size' must be set to identify how many bytes of tag space
+      are available per hardware sector.  For DIF this is either 2 or
+      0 depending on the value of the Control Mode Page ATO bit.
+
+      See 6.2 for a description of get_tag_fn and set_tag_fn.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+2007-12-24 Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>

Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+===============================================================
+==  BT8XXGPIO driver                                         ==
+==                                                           ==
+==  A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card  ==
+==                                                           ==
+==  For advanced documentation, see                          ==
+==  http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php                          ==
+===============================================================
+
+
+A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary
+Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The
+Brooktree chip is used in old analog Hauppauge WinTV PCI cards. You can easily
+find them used for low prices on the net.
+
+The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports.
+These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package.
+
+
+==============================================
+==  How to physically access the GPIO pins  ==
+==============================================
+
+The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip
+and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual
+GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny
+there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case.
+
+The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art.
+The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23
+
+                                           G G G G G G G G G G G G     G G G G G G
+                                           0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1     1 1 1 1 1 1
+                                           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1     2 3 4 5 6 7
+           | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+           ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+         --|                               ^                                     ^   |--
+         --|                               pin 86                           pin 67   |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                               pin 61 >  |-- G18
+         --|                                                                         |-- G19
+         --|                                                                         |-- G20
+         --|                                                                         |-- G21
+         --|                                                                         |-- G22
+         --|                                                               pin 56 >  |-- G23
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                           Brooktree 878/879                             |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|   O                                                                     |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+           ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+           | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+           ^
+           This is pin 1
+

Documentation/cgroups.txt

@@ -390,6 +390,10 @@ If you have several tasks to attach, you have to do it one after another:
 	...
 # /bin/echo PIDn > tasks
 
+You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0:
+
+# echo 0 > tasks
+
 3. Kernel API
 =============
 

Documentation/controllers/devices.txt

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ either an integer or * for all.  Access is a composition of r
 The root device cgroup starts with rwm to 'all'.  A child device
 cgroup gets a copy of the parent.  Administrators can then remove
 devices from the whitelist or add new entries.  A child cgroup can
-never receive a device access which is denied its parent.  However
+never receive a device access which is denied by its parent.  However
 when a device access is removed from a parent it will not also be
 removed from the child(ren).
 
@@ -29,7 +29,11 @@ allows cgroup 1 to read and mknod the device usually known as
 
 	echo a > /cgroups/1/devices.deny
 
-will remove the default 'a *:* mrw' entry.
+will remove the default 'a *:* rwm' entry. Doing
+
+	echo a > /cgroups/1/devices.allow
+
+will add the 'a *:* rwm' entry to the whitelist.
 
 3. Security
 

Documentation/controllers/memory.txt

@@ -242,8 +242,7 @@ rmdir() if there are no tasks.
 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
 3. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
-4. Start reclamation when the limit is lowered
-5. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
+4. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
    not yet hit but the usage is getting closer
 
 Summary

Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt

@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ around '10000' or more.
 show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates
 available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to.
 
-up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings
+up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usage between the samplings
 of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on
 whether it should increase the frequency.  For example when it is set
 to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking

Documentation/cpusets.txt

@@ -154,13 +154,15 @@ browsing and modifying the cpusets presently known to the kernel.  No
 new system calls are added for cpusets - all support for querying and
 modifying cpusets is via this cpuset file system.
 
-The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has two added lines,
+The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has four added lines,
 displaying the tasks cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
 and mems_allowed (on which Memory Nodes it may obtain memory),
-in the format seen in the following example:
+in the two formats seen in the following example:
 
   Cpus_allowed:   ffffffff,ffffffff,ffffffff,ffffffff
+  Cpus_allowed_list:      0-127
   Mems_allowed:   ffffffff,ffffffff
+  Mems_allowed_list:      0-63
 
 Each cpuset is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system
 containing (on top of the standard cgroup files) the following
@@ -542,7 +544,10 @@ otherwise initial value -1 that indicates the cpuset has no request.
    2  : search cores in a package.
    3  : search cpus in a node [= system wide on non-NUMA system]
  ( 4  : search nodes in a chunk of node [on NUMA system] )
- ( 5~ : search system wide [on NUMA system])
+ ( 5  : search system wide [on NUMA system] )
+
+The system default is architecture dependent.  The system default
+can be changed using the relax_domain_level= boot parameter.
 
 This file is per-cpuset and affect the sched domain where the cpuset
 belongs to.  Therefore if the flag 'sched_load_balance' of a cpuset

Documentation/cputopology.txt

@@ -14,9 +14,8 @@ represent the thread siblings to cpu X in the same physical package;
 To implement it in an architecture-neutral way, a new source file,
 drivers/base/topology.c, is to export the 4 attributes.
 
-If one architecture wants to support this feature, it just needs to
-implement 4 defines, typically in file include/asm-XXX/topology.h.
-The 4 defines are:
+For an architecture to support this feature, it must define some of
+these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
 #define topology_physical_package_id(cpu)
 #define topology_core_id(cpu)
 #define topology_thread_siblings(cpu)
@@ -25,17 +24,10 @@ The 4 defines are:
 The type of **_id is int.
 The type of siblings is cpumask_t.
 
-To be consistent on all architectures, the 4 attributes should have
-default values if their values are unavailable. Below is the rule.
-1) physical_package_id: If cpu has no physical package id, -1 is the
-default value.
-2) core_id: If cpu doesn't support multi-core, its core id is 0.
-3) thread_siblings: Just include itself, if the cpu doesn't support
-HT/multi-thread.
-4) core_siblings: Just include itself, if the cpu doesn't support
-multi-core and HT/Multi-thread.
-
-So be careful when declaring the 4 defines in include/asm-XXX/topology.h.
-
-If an attribute isn't defined on an architecture, it won't be exported.
-
+To be consistent on all architectures, include/linux/topology.h
+provides default definitions for any of the above macros that are
+not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
+1) physical_package_id: -1
+2) core_id: 0
+3) thread_siblings: just the given CPU
+4) core_siblings: just the given CPU

Documentation/edac.txt

@@ -222,74 +222,9 @@ both csrow2 and csrow3 are populated, this indicates a dual ranked
 set of DIMMs for channels 0 and 1.
 
 
-Within each of the 'mc','mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several
+Within each of the 'mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several
 EDAC control and attribute files.
 
-
-============================================================================
-DIRECTORY 'mc'
-
-In directory 'mc' are EDAC system overall control and attribute files:
-
-
-Panic on UE control file:
-
-	'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
-
-	An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic.  This is usually
-	desirable.  It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
-	occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
-	system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
-	corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
-	notice the UE.
-
-	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: panic_on_ue=[0|1]
-
-	RUN TIME:  echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
-
-
-Log UE control file:
-
-	'edac_mc_log_ue'
-
-	Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors.  These errors
-	are reported through the system message log system.  UE statistics
-	will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
-
-	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ue=[0|1]
-
-	RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ue
-
-
-Log CE control file:
-
-	'edac_mc_log_ce'
-
-	Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors.  These
-	errors are reported through the system message log system.
-	CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
-
-	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ce=[0|1]
-
-	RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ce
-
-
-Polling period control file:
-
-	'edac_mc_poll_msec'
-
-	The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
-	Too small a value wastes resources.  Too large a value might delay
-	necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
-	locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
-	default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
-	increase this.
-
-	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: poll_msec=[0|1]
-
-	RUN TIME: echo "1000" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_poll_msec
-
-
 ============================================================================
 'mcX' DIRECTORIES
 
@@ -392,7 +327,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate:
 	'sdram_scrub_rate'
 
 	Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing
-	rate is set by writing a minimum bandwith in bytes/sec to the attribute
+	rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute
 	file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at
 	least the specified rate.
 
@@ -537,7 +472,6 @@ Channel 1 DIMM Label control file:
 	motherboard specific and determination of this information
 	must occur in userland at this time.
 
-
 ============================================================================
 SYSTEM LOGGING
 
@@ -570,7 +504,6 @@ error type, a notice of "no info" and then an optional,
 driver-specific error message.
 
 
-
 ============================================================================
 PCI Bus Parity Detection
 
@@ -604,6 +537,74 @@ Enable/Disable PCI Parity checking control file:
 	echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/check_pci_parity
 
 
+Parity Count:
+
+	'pci_parity_count'
+
+	This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
+	have been detected.
+
+
+============================================================================
+MODULE PARAMETERS
+
+Panic on UE control file:
+
+	'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
+
+	An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic.  This is usually
+	desirable.  It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
+	occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
+	system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
+	corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
+	notice the UE.
+
+	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_panic_on_ue=[0|1]
+
+	RUN TIME:  echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
+
+
+Log UE control file:
+
+	'edac_mc_log_ue'
+
+	Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors.  These errors
+	are reported through the system message log system.  UE statistics
+	will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
+
+	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ue=[0|1]
+
+	RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ue
+
+
+Log CE control file:
+
+	'edac_mc_log_ce'
+
+	Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors.  These
+	errors are reported through the system message log system.
+	CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
+
+	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ce=[0|1]
+
+	RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ce
+
+
+Polling period control file:
+
+	'edac_mc_poll_msec'
+
+	The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
+	Too small a value wastes resources.  Too large a value might delay
+	necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
+	locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
+	default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
+	increase this.
+
+	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_poll_msec=[0|1]
+
+	RUN TIME: echo "1000" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_poll_msec
+
 
 Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
 
@@ -614,21 +615,13 @@ Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
 	error has been detected.
 
 
-	module/kernel parameter: panic_on_pci_parity=[0|1]
+	module/kernel parameter: edac_panic_on_pci_pe=[0|1]
 
 	Enable:
-	echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity
+	echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
 
 	Disable:
-	echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity
-
-
-Parity Count:
-
-	'pci_parity_count'
-
-	This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
-	have been detected.
+	echo "0" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
 
 
 

Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver
+================================================
+
+0. Overwiew
+-----------
+The SH7760/SH7763 have an integrated LCD Display controller (LCDC) which
+supports (in theory) resolutions ranging from 1x1 to 1024x1024,
+with color depths ranging from 1 to 16 bits, on STN, DSTN and TFT Panels.
+
+Caveats:
+* Framebuffer memory must be a large chunk allocated at the top
+  of Area3 (HW requirement). Because of this requirement you should NOT
+  make the driver a module since at runtime it may become impossible to
+  get a large enough contiguous chunk of memory.
+
+* The driver does not support changing resolution while loaded
+  (displays aren't hotpluggable anyway)
+
+* Heavy flickering may be observed
+  a) if you're using 15/16bit color modes at >= 640x480 px resolutions,
+  b) during PCMCIA (or any other slow bus) activity.
+
+* Rotation works only 90degress clockwise, and only if horizontal
+  resolution is <= 320 pixels.
+
+files:   drivers/video/sh7760fb.c
+        include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h
+        Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
+
+1. Platform setup
+-----------------
+SH7760:
+ Video data is fetched via the DMABRG DMA engine, so you have to
+ configure the SH DMAC for DMABRG mode (write 0x94808080 to the
+ DMARSRA register somewhere at boot).
+
+ PFC registers PCCR and PCDR must be set to peripheral mode.
+ (write zeros to both).
+
+The driver does NOT do the above for you since board setup is, well, job
+of the board setup code.
+
+2. Panel definitions
+--------------------
+The LCDC must explicitly be told about the type of LCD panel
+attached.  Data must be wrapped in a "struct sh7760fb_platdata" and
+passed to the driver as platform_data.
+
+Suggest you take a closer look at the SH7760 Manual, Section 30.
+(http://documentation.renesas.com/eng/products/mpumcu/e602291_sh7760.pdf)
+
+The following code illustrates what needs to be done to
+get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT:
+
+====================== cut here ======================================
+
+#include <linux/fb.h>
+#include <asm/sh7760fb.h>
+
+/*
+ * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT
+ * dotclock 25175 kHz
+ * Xres                640     Yres            480
+ * Htotal      800     Vtotal          525
+ * HsynStart   656     VsynStart       490
+ * HsynLenn    30      VsynLenn        2
+ *
+ * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen
+ * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments
+ * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given
+ * panel sync timings.
+ */
+static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = {
+       .name           = "NL6448BC26",
+       .refresh        = 60,
+       .xres           = 640,
+       .yres           = 480,
+       .pixclock       = 39683,        /* in picoseconds! */
+       .hsync_len      = 30,
+       .vsync_len      = 2,
+       .left_margin    = 114,  /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */
+       .right_margin   = 16,   /* HSYNSTART - XRES */
+       .upper_margin   = 33,   /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */
+       .lower_margin   = 10,   /* VSYNSTART - YRES */
+       .sync           = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT,
+       .vmode          = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED,
+       .flag           = 0,
+};
+
+static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = {
+       .def_mode       = &nl6448bc26,
+       .ldmtr          = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16,   /* 16bit TFT panel */
+       .lddfr          = LDDFR_8BPP,           /* we want 8bit output */
+       .ldpmmr         = 0x0070,
+       .ldpspr         = 0x0500,
+       .ldaclnr        = 0,
+       .ldickr         = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) |
+                         LDICKR_CLKDIV(1),
+       .rotate         = 0,
+       .novsync        = 1,
+       .blank          = NULL,
+};
+
+/* SH7760:
+ * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram
+ * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers
+ */
+static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = {
+       [0] = {
+               .start  = 0xFE300800,
+               .end    = 0xFE300CFF,
+               .flags  = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+       },
+       [1] = {
+               .start  = 65,
+               .end    = 65,
+               .flags  = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
+       },
+};
+
+static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = {
+       .dev    = {
+               .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448,
+       },
+       .name           = "sh7760-lcdc",
+       .id             = -1,
+       .resource       = sh7760_lcdc_res,
+       .num_resources  = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res),
+};
+
+====================== cut here ======================================

Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt

@@ -3,11 +3,25 @@ Tridentfb is a framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards.
 The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are
 tested:
 
-those from the Image series with Cyber in their names - accelerated
-those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...) - accelerated
-the newer CyberBladeXP family  - nonaccelerated
-
-Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported, none of the older Tridents.
+those from the TGUI series 9440/96XX and with Cyber in their names
+those from the Image series and with Cyber in their names
+those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...)
+the newer CyberBladeXP family
+
+All families are accelerated. Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported,
+none of the older Tridents.
+The driver supports 8, 16 and 32 bits per pixel depths.
+The TGUI family requires a line length to be power of 2 if acceleration
+is enabled. This means that range of possible resolutions and bpp is
+limited comparing to the range if acceleration is disabled (see list
+of parameters below).
+
+Known bugs:
+1. The driver randomly locks up on 3DImage975 chip with acceleration
+   enabled. The same happens in X11 (Xorg).
+2. The ramdac speeds require some more fine tuning. It is possible to
+   switch resolution which the chip does not support at some depths for
+   older chips.
 
 How to use it?
 ==============
@@ -17,12 +31,11 @@ video=tridentfb
 
 The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example.
 
-video=tridentfb:800x600,bpp=16,noaccel
+video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel
 
 The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are:
 
 noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card)
-accel - force text acceleration (for boards which by default are noacceled)
 
 fp	- use flat panel related stuff
 crt 	- assume monitor is present instead of fp
@@ -31,21 +44,24 @@ center 	- for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the
 	  image, otherwise use
 stretch
 
-memsize - integer value in Kb, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
+memsize - integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
 	  look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing.
-memdiff - integer value in Kb,should be nonzero if your card reports
-	  more memory than it actually has.For instance mine is 192K less than
+
+memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
+	  more memory than it actually has. For instance mine is 192K less than
 	  detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M.
 	  Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of
-	  configurable size.Otherwise use memsize.
-	  If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage at the bottom
-	  this might help by not letting change to that mode anymore.
+	  configurable size. Otherwise use memsize.
+	  If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage
+	  at the bottom this might help by not letting change to that mode
+	  anymore.
 
 nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024
 	  800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it.
 
-bpp  - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
-mode - a mode name like 800x600 (as described in Documentation/fb/modedb.txt)
+bpp	- bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
+mode	- a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in
+	  Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
 
 Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver
 misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -47,6 +47,30 @@ Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:	old tuner-3036 i2c driver
+When:	2.6.28
+Why:	This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver
+	boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2,
+	and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these
+	devices, it was decided to drop it.
+Who:	Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
+	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+
+ ---------------------------
+
+What:   V4L2 dpc7146 driver
+When:   2.6.28
+Why:    Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer
+	relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was
+	probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration
+	board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a
+	lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync
+	with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API.
+Who:    Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
+	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:	PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
 When:	November 2005
 Files:	drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
@@ -138,24 +162,6 @@ Who:	Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@suse.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	find_task_by_pid
-When:	2.6.26
-Why:	With pid namespaces, calling this funciton will return the
-	wrong task when called from inside a namespace.
-
-	The best way to save a task pid and find a task by this
-	pid later, is to find this task's struct pid pointer (or get
-	it directly from the task) and call pid_task() later.
-
-	If someone really needs to get a task by its pid_t, then
-	he most likely needs the find_task_by_vpid() to get the
-	task from the same namespace as the current task is in, but
-	this may be not so in general.
-
-Who:	Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	ACPI procfs interface
 When:	July 2008
 Why:	ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008.
@@ -222,13 +228,6 @@ Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	i2c-i810, i2c-prosavage and i2c-savage4
-When:	May 2008
-Why:	These drivers are superseded by i810fb, intelfb and savagefb.
-Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What (Why):
 	- include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_TOS.h ipt_tos.h header files
 	  (superseded by xt_TOS/xt_tos target & match)
@@ -307,8 +306,41 @@ Who:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	asm/semaphore.h
-When:	2.6.26
-Why:	Implementation became generic; users should now include
-	linux/semaphore.h instead.
-Who:	Matthew Wilcox <willy@linux.intel.com>
+What:	SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_OLD,
+	SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_OLD
+When: 	June 2009
+Why:    A newer version of the options have been introduced in 2005 that
+	removes the limitions of the old API.  The sctp library has been
+        converted to use these new options at the same time.  Any user
+	space app that directly uses the old options should convert to using
+	the new options.
+Who:	Vlad Yasevich <vladislav.yasevich@hp.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	CONFIG_THERMAL_HWMON
+When:	January 2009
+Why:	This option was introduced just to allow older lm-sensors userspace
+	to keep working over the upgrade to 2.6.26. At the scheduled time of
+	removal fixed lm-sensors (2.x or 3.x) should be readily available.
+Who:	Rene Herman <rene.herman@gmail.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Code that is now under CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT_SYSFS
+	(in net/core/net-sysfs.c)
+When:	After the only user (hal) has seen a release with the patches
+	for enough time, probably some time in 2010.
+Why:	Over 1K .text/.data size reduction, data is available in other
+	ways (ioctls)
+Who:	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What: CONFIG_NF_CT_ACCT
+When: 2.6.29
+Why:  Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation.
+      Currently used only to set a default value for a feature that is also
+      controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter.
+Who:  Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl>
+

Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -510,6 +510,7 @@ prototypes:
 	void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*);
 	int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *);
 	int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *);
+	int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int);
 
 locking rules:
 		BKL	mmap_sem	PageLocked(page)
@@ -517,6 +518,7 @@ open:		no	yes
 close:		no	yes
 fault:		no	yes
 page_mkwrite:	no	yes		no
+access:		no	yes
 
 	->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is
 about to become writeable. The file system is responsible for
@@ -525,6 +527,11 @@ taking to lock out truncate, the page range should be verified to be
 within i_size. The page mapping should also be checked that it is not
 NULL.
 
+	->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in
+acces_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through
+/proc/pid/mem or ptrace.  This function is needed only for
+VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs.
+
 ================================================================================
 			Dubious stuff
 

Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt

@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ You can simplify mounting by just typing:
 
 this will allocate the first available loopback device (and load loop.o 
 kernel module if necessary) automatically. If the loopback driver is not
-loaded automatically, make sure that your kernel is compiled with kmod 
-support (CONFIG_KMOD) enabled. Beware that umount will not
-deallocate /dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a
-symbolic link to /proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using
-"-d" switch of losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
+loaded automatically, make sure that you have compiled the module and
+that modprobe is functioning. Beware that umount will not deallocate
+/dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a symbolic link to
+/proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using "-d" switch of
+losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
 
 To create the BFS image under UnixWare you need to find out first which
 slice contains it. The command prtvtoc(1M) is your friend:

Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c

@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group,
 
 	simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL);
 	if (!simple_child)
-		return NULL;
+		return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
 
 	config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group
 	simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children),
 				  GFP_KERNEL);
 	if (!simple_children)
-		return NULL;
+		return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
 
 	config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,

Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt

@@ -13,72 +13,93 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
 1. Quick usage instructions:
 ===========================
 
-  - Grab updated e2fsprogs from
-    ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tytso/e2fsprogs-interim/
-    This is a patchset on top of e2fsprogs-1.39, which can be found at
+  - Compile and install the latest version of e2fsprogs (as of this
+    writing version 1.41) from:
+
+    http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406
+	
+	or
+
     ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tytso/e2fsprogs/
 
-  - It's still mke2fs -j /dev/hda1
+	or grab the latest git repository from:
+
+    git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git
+
+  - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type:
+
+    	# mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1
+
+    Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set
+    the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development
+    filesystem to touch this filesystem:
 
-  - mount /dev/hda1 /wherever -t ext4dev
+	# tune2fs -O extents -E test_fs /dev/hda1
 
-  - To enable extents,
+    If the filesystem was created with 128 byte inodes, it can be
+    converted to use 256 byte for greater efficiency via:
 
-	mount /dev/hda1 /wherever -t ext4dev -o extents
+        # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1
 
-  - The filesystem is compatible with the ext3 driver until you add a file
-    which has extents (ie: `mount -o extents', then create a file).
+    (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev
+    filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production
+    filesystems.)
 
-    NOTE: The "extents" mount flag is temporary.  It will soon go away and
-    extents will be enabled by the "-o extents" flag to mke2fs or tune2fs
+  - Mounting:
+
+	# mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever
 
   - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that
-    ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.  So
-    when comparing with a metadata-only journalling filesystem, use `mount -o
-    data=writeback'.  And you might as well use `mount -o nobh' too along
-    with it.  Making the journal larger than the mke2fs default often helps
-    performance with metadata-intensive workloads.
+    ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.
+    So when comparing with a metadata-only journalling filesystem, such
+    as ext3, use `mount -o data=writeback'.  And you might as well use
+    `mount -o nobh' too along with it.  Making the journal larger than
+    the mke2fs default often helps performance with metadata-intensive
+    workloads.
 
 2. Features
 ===========
 
 2.1 Currently available
 
-* ability to use filesystems > 16TB
+* ability to use filesystems > 16TB (e2fsprogs support not available yet)
 * extent format reduces metadata overhead (RAM, IO for access, transactions)
 * extent format more robust in face of on-disk corruption due to magics,
 * internal redunancy in tree
-
-2.1 Previously available, soon to be enabled by default by "mkefs.ext4":
-
-* dir_index and resize inode will be on by default
-* large inodes will be used by default for fast EAs, nsec timestamps, etc
+* improved file allocation (multi-block alloc)
+* fix 32000 subdirectory limit
+* nsec timestamps for mtime, atime, ctime, create time
+* inode version field on disk (NFSv4, Lustre)
+* reduced e2fsck time via uninit_bg feature
+* journal checksumming for robustness, performance
+* persistent file preallocation (e.g for streaming media, databases)
+* ability to pack bitmaps and inode tables into larger virtual groups via the
+  flex_bg feature
+* large file support
+* Inode allocation using large virtual block groups via flex_bg
+* delayed allocation
+* large block (up to pagesize) support
+* efficent new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4(avoid using buffer head to force
+  the ordering)
 
 2.2 Candidate features for future inclusion
 
-There are several under discussion, whether they all make it in is
-partly a function of how much time everyone has to work on them:
+* Online defrag (patches available but not well tested)
+* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjuction with
+  the uninit_bg feature (capability to do this is available in e2fsprogs
+  but a kernel thread to do lazy zeroing of unused inode table blocks
+  after filesystem is first mounted is required for safety)
 
-* improved file allocation (multi-block alloc, delayed alloc; basically done)
-* fix 32000 subdirectory limit (patch exists, needs some e2fsck work)
-* nsec timestamps for mtime, atime, ctime, create time (patch exists,
-  needs some e2fsck work)
-* inode version field on disk (NFSv4, Lustre; prototype exists)
-* reduced mke2fs/e2fsck time via uninitialized groups (prototype exists)
-* journal checksumming for robustness, performance (prototype exists)
-* persistent file preallocation (e.g for streaming media, databases)
+There are several others under discussion, whether they all make it in is
+partly a function of how much time everyone has to work on them. Features like
+metadata checksumming have been discussed and planned for a bit but no patches
+exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term roadmap.
 
-Features like metadata checksumming have been discussed and planned for
-a bit but no patches exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term
-roadmap.
+The big performance win will come with mballoc, delalloc and flex_bg
+grouping of bitmaps and inode tables.  Some test results available here:
 
-The big performance win will come with mballoc and delalloc.  CFS has
-been using mballoc for a few years already with Lustre, and IBM + Bull
-did a lot of benchmarking on it.  The reason it isn't in the first set of
-patches is partly a manageability issue, and partly because it doesn't
-directly affect the on-disk format (outside of much better allocation)
-so it isn't critical to get into the first round of changes.  I believe
-Alex is working on a new set of patches right now.
+ - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-write-2.6.26-rc2.html
+ - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.26-rc2.html
 
 3. Options
 ==========
@@ -222,9 +243,11 @@ stripe=n		Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try
 			to use for allocation size and alignment. For RAID5/6
 			systems this should be the number of data
 			disks *  RAID chunk size in file system blocks.
-
+delalloc	(*)	Deferring block allocation until write-out time.
+nodelalloc		Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation
+			when data is copied from user to page cache.
 Data Mode
----------
+=========
 There are 3 different data modes:
 
 * writeback mode
@@ -236,10 +259,10 @@ typically provide the best ext4 performance.
 
 * ordered mode
 In data=ordered mode, ext4 only officially journals metadata, but it logically
-groups metadata and data blocks into a single unit called a transaction.  When
-it's time to write the new metadata out to disk, the associated data blocks
-are written first.  In general, this mode performs slightly slower than
-writeback but significantly faster than journal mode.
+groups metadata information related to data changes with the data blocks into a
+single unit called a transaction.  When it's time to write the new metadata
+out to disk, the associated data blocks are written first.  In general,
+this mode performs slightly slower than writeback but significantly faster than journal mode.
 
 * journal mode
 data=journal mode provides full data and metadata journaling.  All new data is
@@ -247,7 +270,8 @@ written to the journal first, and then to its final location.
 In the event of a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both data and
 metadata into a consistent state.  This mode is the slowest except when data
 needs to be read from and written to disk at the same time where it
-outperforms all others modes.
+outperforms all others modes.  Curently ext4 does not have delayed
+allocation support if this data journalling mode is selected.
 
 References
 ==========
@@ -256,7 +280,8 @@ kernel source:	<file:fs/ext4/>
 		<file:fs/jbd2/>
 
 programs:	http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
-		http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net
 
 useful links:	http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/ext3-devel
 		http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/
+		http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page
+		http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/Ext4

Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+                   Glock internal locking rules
+                  ------------------------------
+
+This documents the basic principles of the glock state machine
+internals. Each glock (struct gfs2_glock in fs/gfs2/incore.h)
+has two main (internal) locks:
+
+ 1. A spinlock (gl_spin) which protects the internal state such
+    as gl_state, gl_target and the list of holders (gl_holders)
+ 2. A non-blocking bit lock, GLF_LOCK, which is used to prevent other
+    threads from making calls to the DLM, etc. at the same time. If a
+    thread takes this lock, it must then call run_queue (usually via the
+    workqueue) when it releases it in order to ensure any pending tasks
+    are completed.
+
+The gl_holders list contains all the queued lock requests (not
+just the holders) associated with the glock. If there are any
+held locks, then they will be contiguous entries at the head
+of the list. Locks are granted in strictly the order that they
+are queued, except for those marked LM_FLAG_PRIORITY which are
+used only during recovery, and even then only for journal locks.
+
+There are three lock states that users of the glock layer can request,
+namely shared (SH), deferred (DF) and exclusive (EX). Those translate
+to the following DLM lock modes:
+
+Glock mode    | DLM lock mode
+------------------------------
+    UN        |    IV/NL  Unlocked (no DLM lock associated with glock) or NL
+    SH        |    PR     (Protected read)
+    DF        |    CW     (Concurrent write)
+    EX        |    EX     (Exclusive)
+
+Thus DF is basically a shared mode which is incompatible with the "normal"
+shared lock mode, SH. In GFS2 the DF mode is used exclusively for direct I/O
+operations. The glocks are basically a lock plus some routines which deal
+with cache management. The following rules apply for the cache:
+
+Glock mode   |  Cache data | Cache Metadata | Dirty Data | Dirty Metadata
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    UN       |     No      |       No       |     No     |      No
+    SH       |     Yes     |       Yes      |     No     |      No
+    DF       |     No      |       Yes      |     No     |      No
+    EX       |     Yes     |       Yes      |     Yes    |      Yes
+
+These rules are implemented using the various glock operations which
+are defined for each type of glock. Not all types of glocks use
+all the modes. Only inode glocks use the DF mode for example.
+
+Table of glock operations and per type constants:
+
+Field            | Purpose
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+go_xmote_th      | Called before remote state change (e.g. to sync dirty data)
+go_xmote_bh      | Called after remote state change (e.g. to refill cache)
+go_inval         | Called if remote state change requires invalidating the cache
+go_demote_ok     | Returns boolean value of whether its ok to demote a glock
+                 | (e.g. checks timeout, and that there is no cached data)
+go_lock          | Called for the first local holder of a lock
+go_unlock        | Called on the final local unlock of a lock
+go_dump          | Called to print content of object for debugfs file, or on
+                 | error to dump glock to the log.
+go_type;         | The type of the glock, LM_TYPE_.....
+go_min_hold_time | The minimum hold time
+
+The minimum hold time for each lock is the time after a remote lock
+grant for which we ignore remote demote requests. This is in order to
+prevent a situation where locks are being bounced around the cluster
+from node to node with none of the nodes making any progress. This
+tends to show up most with shared mmaped files which are being written
+to by multiple nodes. By delaying the demotion in response to a
+remote callback, that gives the userspace program time to make
+some progress before the pages are unmapped.
+
+There is a plan to try and remove the go_lock and go_unlock callbacks
+if possible, in order to try and speed up the fast path though the locking.
+Also, eventually we hope to make the glock "EX" mode locally shared
+such that any local locking will be done with the i_mutex as required
+rather than via the glock.
+
+Locking rules for glock operations:
+
+Operation     |  GLF_LOCK bit lock held |  gl_spin spinlock held
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+go_xmote_th   |       Yes               |       No
+go_xmote_bh   |       Yes               |       No
+go_inval      |       Yes               |       No
+go_demote_ok  |       Sometimes         |       Yes
+go_lock       |       Yes               |       No
+go_unlock     |       Yes               |       No
+go_dump       |       Sometimes         |       Yes
+
+N.B. Operations must not drop either the bit lock or the spinlock
+if its held on entry. go_dump and do_demote_ok must never block.
+Note that go_dump will only be called if the glock's state
+indicates that it is caching uptodate data.
+
+Glock locking order within GFS2:
+
+ 1. i_mutex (if required)
+ 2. Rename glock (for rename only)
+ 3. Inode glock(s)
+    (Parents before children, inodes at "same level" with same parent in
+     lock number order)
+ 4. Rgrp glock(s) (for (de)allocation operations)
+ 5. Transaction glock (via gfs2_trans_begin) for non-read operations
+ 6. Page lock  (always last, very important!)
+
+There are two glocks per inode. One deals with access to the inode
+itself (locking order as above), and the other, known as the iopen
+glock is used in conjunction with the i_nlink field in the inode to
+determine the lifetime of the inode in question. Locking of inodes
+is on a per-inode basis. Locking of rgrps is on a per rgrp basis.
+

Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 ################################################################################
 
  Author: NetApp and Open Grid Computing
- Date: April 15, 2008
+ Date: May 29, 2008
 
 Table of Contents
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -60,16 +60,18 @@ Installation
     The procedures described in this document have been tested with
     distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/).
 
-  - Install nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater on the client
+  - Install nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater on the client
 
-    An NFS/RDMA mount point can only be obtained by using the mount.nfs
-    command in nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater. To see which version of mount.nfs
-    you are using, type:
+    An NFS/RDMA mount point can be obtained by using the mount.nfs command in
+    nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater (nfs-utils-1.1.1 was the first nfs-utils
+    version with support for NFS/RDMA mounts, but for various reasons we
+    recommend using nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater). To see which version of
+    mount.nfs you are using, type:
 
-    > /sbin/mount.nfs -V
+    $ /sbin/mount.nfs -V
 
-    If the version is less than 1.1.1 or the command does not exist,
-    then you will need to install the latest version of nfs-utils.
+    If the version is less than 1.1.2 or the command does not exist,
+    you should install the latest version of nfs-utils.
 
     Download the latest package from:
 
@@ -77,22 +79,33 @@ Installation
 
     Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions.
 
-    If you will not be using GSS and NFSv4, the installation process
-    can be simplified by disabling these features when running configure:
+    If you will not need the idmapper and gssd executables (you do not need
+    these to create an NFS/RDMA enabled mount command), the installation
+    process can be simplified by disabling these features when running
+    configure:
 
-    > ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4
+    $ ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4
 
-    For more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files.
+    To build nfs-utils you will need the tcp_wrappers package installed. For
+    more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files.
 
     After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in
     the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3,
-    or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called mount.nfs4.
-    The standard technique is to create a symlink called mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs.
+    or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called
+    mount.nfs4.  The standard technique is to create a symlink called
+    mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs.
 
-    NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater is only needed
+    This mount.nfs binary should be installed at /sbin/mount.nfs as follows:
+
+    $ sudo cp utils/mount/mount.nfs /sbin/mount.nfs
+
+    In this location, mount.nfs will be invoked automatically for NFS mounts
+    by the system mount commmand.
+
+    NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater is only needed
     on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of
     nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from
-    nfs-utils-1.1.1 is needed on the client.
+    nfs-utils-1.1.2 is needed on the client.
 
   - Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA
 
@@ -156,8 +169,8 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
     this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel
     card:
 
-    > modprobe ib_mthca
-    > modprobe ib_ipoib
+    $ modprobe ib_mthca
+    $ modprobe ib_ipoib
 
     If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM)
     running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can
@@ -166,7 +179,7 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
 
     If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following:
 
-    > cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state
+    $ cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state
     4: ACTIVE
 
     where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc.
@@ -174,10 +187,10 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
     To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this
     assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2):
 
-    host1> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.x
-    host2> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.y
-    host1> ping a.b.c.y
-    host2> ping a.b.c.x
+    host1$ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.x
+    host2$ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.y
+    host1$ ping a.b.c.y
+    host2$ ping a.b.c.x
 
     For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures.
 
@@ -202,11 +215,11 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
     /vol0   192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
     /vol0   192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
 
-    The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand HCA or the
-    cleint's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC.
+    The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand
+    HCA or the cleint's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC.
 
-    NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does not
-    use a reserved port.
+    NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does
+    not use a reserved port.
 
  Each time a machine boots:
 
@@ -214,43 +227,45 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
 
     For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter:
 
-    > modprobe ib_mthca
-    > modprobe ib_ipoib
-    > ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.d
+    $ modprobe ib_mthca
+    $ modprobe ib_ipoib
+    $ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.d
 
     NOTE: use unique addresses for the client and server
 
   - Start the NFS server
 
-    If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config),
-    load the RDMA transport module:
+    If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in
+    kernel config), load the RDMA transport module:
 
-    > modprobe svcrdma
+    $ modprobe svcrdma
 
-    Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the server:
+    Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the
+    server:
 
-    > /etc/init.d/nfs start
+    $ /etc/init.d/nfs start
 
     or
 
-    > service nfs start
+    $ service nfs start
 
     Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport:
 
-    > echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
+    $ echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
 
   - On the client system
 
-    If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config),
-    load the RDMA client module:
+    If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in
+    kernel config), load the RDMA client module:
 
-    > modprobe xprtrdma.ko
+    $ modprobe xprtrdma.ko
 
-    Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), issue the mount.nfs command:
+    Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), use this
+    command to mount the NFS/RDMA server:
 
-    > /path/to/your/mount.nfs <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt -i -o rdma,port=2050
+    $ mount -o rdma,port=2050 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt
 
-    To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check the
-    "proto" field for the given mount.
+    To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check
+    the "proto" field for the given mount.
 
   Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA!

Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS)
+
+Overview
+========
+
+OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR
+and Rio Karma MP3 player.  The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing
+block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories.  This
+filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these
+devices.
+
+Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general
+filesystem for your own streaming media device.  Native Linux filesystems
+will likely perform better.
+
+More information is available at:
+
+    http://linux-karma.sf.net/
+
+Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with
+omfsprogs, available at:
+
+    http://bobcopeland.com/karma/
+
+Instructions are included in its README.
+
+Options
+=======
+
+OMFS supports the following mount-time options:
+
+    uid=n        - make all files owned by specified user
+    gid=n        - make all files owned by specified group
+    umask=xxx    - set permission umask to xxx
+    fmask=xxx    - set umask to xxx for files
+    dmask=xxx    - set umask to xxx for directories
+
+Disk format
+===========
+
+OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks.  The sysblock
+group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures,
+and extents.  Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire
+sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk.  A sysblock may
+have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the
+same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is
+unused.
+
+Sysblock header information:
+
+struct omfs_header {
+        __be64 h_self;                  /* FS block where this is located */
+        __be32 h_body_size;             /* size of useful data after header */
+        __be16 h_crc;                   /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */
+        char h_fill1[2];
+        u8 h_version;                   /* version, always 1 */
+        char h_type;                    /* OMFS_INODE_X */
+        u8 h_magic;                     /* OMFS_IMAGIC */
+        u8 h_check_xor;                 /* XOR of header bytes before this */
+        __be32 h_fill2;
+};
+
+Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode:
+
+struct omfs_inode {
+        struct omfs_header i_head;      /* header */
+        __be64 i_parent;                /* parent containing this inode */
+        __be64 i_sibling;               /* next inode in hash bucket */
+        __be64 i_ctime;                 /* ctime, in milliseconds */
+        char i_fill1[35];
+        char i_type;                    /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */
+        __be32 i_fill2;
+        char i_fill3[64];
+        char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN];      /* filename */
+        __be64 i_size;                  /* size of file, in bytes */
+};
+
+Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table.  Filenames are
+hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START.
+Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers
+until a match is found on i_name.  Empty buckets are represented by block
+pointers with all-1s (~0).
+
+A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at
+OMFS_EXTENT_START:
+
+struct omfs_extent_entry {
+        __be64 e_cluster;               /* start location of a set of blocks */
+        __be64 e_blocks;                /* number of blocks after e_cluster */
+};
+
+struct omfs_extent {
+        __be64 e_next;                  /* next extent table location */
+        __be32 e_extent_count;          /* total # extents in this table */
+        __be32 e_fill;
+        struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry;       /* start of extent entries */
+};
+
+Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to
+the extent.  The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster
+being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks
+in the table.
+
+If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by
+e_next.  These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure.
+

Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt

@@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ Table 1-4: Kernel info in /proc
  uptime      System uptime                                     
  version     Kernel version                                    
  video	     bttv info of video resources			(2.4)
+ vmallocinfo Show vmalloced areas
 ..............................................................................
 
 You can,  for  example,  check  which interrupts are currently in use and what
@@ -380,28 +381,35 @@ i386 and x86_64 platforms support the new IRQ vector displays.
 Of some interest is the introduction of the /proc/irq directory to 2.4.
 It could be used to set IRQ to CPU affinity, this means that you can "hook" an
 IRQ to only one CPU, or to exclude a CPU of handling IRQs. The contents of the
-irq subdir is one subdir for each IRQ, and one file; prof_cpu_mask
+irq subdir is one subdir for each IRQ, and two files; default_smp_affinity and
+prof_cpu_mask.
 
 For example 
   > ls /proc/irq/
   0  10  12  14  16  18  2  4  6  8  prof_cpu_mask
-  1  11  13  15  17  19  3  5  7  9
+  1  11  13  15  17  19  3  5  7  9  default_smp_affinity
   > ls /proc/irq/0/
   smp_affinity
 
-The contents of the prof_cpu_mask file and each smp_affinity file for each IRQ
-is the same by default:
+smp_affinity is a bitmask, in which you can specify which CPUs can handle the
+IRQ, you can set it by doing:
 
-  > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity 
-  ffffffff
+  > echo 1 > /proc/irq/10/smp_affinity
+
+This means that only the first CPU will handle the IRQ, but you can also echo
+5 which means that only the first and fourth CPU can handle the IRQ.
+
+The contents of each smp_affinity file is the same by default:
 
-It's a bitmask, in which you can specify which CPUs can handle the IRQ, you can
-set it by doing:
+  > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity
+  ffffffff
 
-  > echo 1 > /proc/irq/prof_cpu_mask
+The default_smp_affinity mask applies to all non-active IRQs, which are the
+IRQs which have not yet been allocated/activated, and hence which lack a
+/proc/irq/[0-9]* directory.
 
-This means that only the first CPU will handle the IRQ, but you can also echo 5
-which means that only the first and fourth CPU can handle the IRQ.
+prof_cpu_mask specifies which CPUs are to be profiled by the system wide
+profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all cpus).
 
 The way IRQs are routed is handled by the IO-APIC, and it's Round Robin
 between all the CPUs which are allowed to handle it. As usual the kernel has
@@ -550,6 +558,49 @@ VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area
  VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used
 VmallocChunk: largest contigious block of vmalloc area which is free
 
+..............................................................................
+
+vmallocinfo:
+
+Provides information about vmalloced/vmaped areas. One line per area,
+containing the virtual address range of the area, size in bytes,
+caller information of the creator, and optional information depending
+on the kind of area :
+
+ pages=nr    number of pages
+ phys=addr   if a physical address was specified
+ ioremap     I/O mapping (ioremap() and friends)
+ vmalloc     vmalloc() area
+ vmap        vmap()ed pages
+ user        VM_USERMAP area
+ vpages      buffer for pages pointers was vmalloced (huge area)
+ N<node>=nr  (Only on NUMA kernels)
+             Number of pages allocated on memory node <node>
+
+> cat /proc/vmallocinfo
+0xffffc20000000000-0xffffc20000201000 2101248 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+  /0x2c0 pages=512 vmalloc N0=128 N1=128 N2=128 N3=128
+0xffffc20000201000-0xffffc20000302000 1052672 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+  /0x2c0 pages=256 vmalloc N0=64 N1=64 N2=64 N3=64
+0xffffc20000302000-0xffffc20000304000    8192 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+  phys=7fee8000 ioremap
+0xffffc20000304000-0xffffc20000307000   12288 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+  phys=7fee7000 ioremap
+0xffffc2000031d000-0xffffc2000031f000    8192 init_vdso_vars+0x112/0x210
+0xffffc2000031f000-0xffffc2000032b000   49152 cramfs_uncompress_init+0x2e ...
+  /0x80 pages=11 vmalloc N0=3 N1=3 N2=2 N3=3
+0xffffc2000033a000-0xffffc2000033d000   12288 sys_swapon+0x640/0xac0      ...
+  pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+0xffffc20000347000-0xffffc2000034c000   20480 xt_alloc_table_info+0xfe ...
+  /0x130 [x_tables] pages=4 vmalloc N0=4
+0xffffffffa0000000-0xffffffffa000f000   61440 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=14 vmalloc N2=14
+0xffffffffa000f000-0xffffffffa0014000   20480 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=4 vmalloc N1=4
+0xffffffffa0014000-0xffffffffa0017000   12288 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+0xffffffffa0017000-0xffffffffa0022000   45056 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=10 vmalloc N0=10
 
 1.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide
 ----------------------------
@@ -880,7 +931,7 @@ group_prealloc  max_to_scan  mb_groups  mb_history  min_to_scan  order2_req
 stats  stream_req
 
 mb_groups:
-This file gives the details of mutiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
+This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
 
 mb_history:
 Multiblock allocation history.
@@ -1423,7 +1474,7 @@ used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
 normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
 (=0) is used.
 
-zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following exprssion.
+zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
 
 (i < j):
   zone[i]->protection[j]

Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt

@@ -294,6 +294,16 @@ user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available
 (including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or
 buf->chan->private_data.
 
+Buffer-only channels
+--------------------
+
+These channels have no files associated and can be created with
+relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such
+as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these
+cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call
+relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files,
+to expose the buffered data to the userspace.
+
 Channel 'modes'
 ---------------
 

Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt

@@ -248,6 +248,7 @@ The top level sysfs directory looks like:
 block/
 bus/
 class/
+dev/
 devices/
 firmware/
 net/
@@ -274,6 +275,11 @@ fs/ contains a directory for some filesystems.  Currently each
 filesystem wanting to export attributes must create its own hierarchy
 below fs/ (see ./fuse.txt for an example).
 
+dev/ contains two directories char/ and block/. Inside these two
+directories there are symlinks named <major>:<minor>.  These symlinks
+point to the sysfs directory for the given device.  /sys/dev provides a
+quick way to lookup the sysfs interface for a device from the result of
+a stat(2) operation.
 
 More information can driver-model specific features can be found in
 Documentation/driver-model/. 

Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+Introduction
+=============
+
+UBIFS file-system stands for UBI File System. UBI stands for "Unsorted
+Block Images". UBIFS is a flash file system, which means it is designed
+to work with flash devices. It is important to understand, that UBIFS
+is completely different to any traditional file-system in Linux, like
+Ext2, XFS, JFS, etc. UBIFS represents a separate class of file-systems
+which work with MTD devices, not block devices. The other Linux
+file-system of this class is JFFS2.
+
+To make it more clear, here is a small comparison of MTD devices and
+block devices.
+
+1 MTD devices represent flash devices and they consist of eraseblocks of
+  rather large size, typically about 128KiB. Block devices consist of
+  small blocks, typically 512 bytes.
+2 MTD devices support 3 main operations - read from some offset within an
+  eraseblock, write to some offset within an eraseblock, and erase a whole
+  eraseblock. Block  devices support 2 main operations - read a whole
+  block and write a whole block.
+3 The whole eraseblock has to be erased before it becomes possible to
+  re-write its contents. Blocks may be just re-written.
+4 Eraseblocks become worn out after some number of erase cycles -
+  typically 100K-1G for SLC NAND and NOR flashes, and 1K-10K for MLC
+  NAND flashes. Blocks do not have the wear-out property.
+5 Eraseblocks may become bad (only on NAND flashes) and software should
+  deal with this. Blocks on hard drives typically do not become bad,
+  because hardware has mechanisms to substitute bad blocks, at least in
+  modern LBA disks.
+
+It should be quite obvious why UBIFS is very different to traditional
+file-systems.
+
+UBIFS works on top of UBI. UBI is a separate software layer which may be
+found in drivers/mtd/ubi. UBI is basically a volume management and
+wear-leveling layer. It provides so called UBI volumes which is a higher
+level abstraction than a MTD device. The programming model of UBI devices
+is very similar to MTD devices - they still consist of large eraseblocks,
+they have read/write/erase operations, but UBI devices are devoid of
+limitations like wear and bad blocks (items 4 and 5 in the above list).
+
+In a sense, UBIFS is a next generation of JFFS2 file-system, but it is
+very different and incompatible to JFFS2. The following are the main
+differences.
+
+* JFFS2 works on top of MTD devices, UBIFS depends on UBI and works on
+  top of UBI volumes.
+* JFFS2 does not have on-media index and has to build it while mounting,
+  which requires full media scan. UBIFS maintains the FS indexing
+  information on the flash media and does not require full media scan,
+  so it mounts many times faster than JFFS2.
+* JFFS2 is a write-through file-system, while UBIFS supports write-back,
+  which makes UBIFS much faster on writes.
+
+Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-flight compression which makes
+it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash.
+
+Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts.
+It does not need stuff like ckfs.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
+journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data
+structures are consistent.
+
+UBIFS scales logarithmically (most of the data structures it uses are
+trees), so the mount time and memory consumption do not linearly depend
+on the flash size, like in case of JFFS2. This is because UBIFS
+maintains the FS index on the flash media. However, UBIFS depends on
+UBI, which scales linearly. So overall UBI/UBIFS stack scales linearly.
+Nevertheless, UBI/UBIFS scales considerably better than JFFS2.
+
+The authors of UBIFS believe, that it is possible to develop UBI2 which
+would scale logarithmically as well. UBI2 would support the same API as UBI,
+but it would be binary incompatible to UBI. So UBIFS would not need to be
+changed to use UBI2
+
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+(*) == default.
+
+norm_unmount (*)	commit on unmount; the journal is committed
+			when the file-system is unmounted so that the
+			next mount does not have to replay the journal
+			and it becomes very fast;
+fast_unmount		do not commit on unmount; this option makes
+			unmount faster, but the next mount slower
+			because of the need to replay the journal.
+
+
+Quick usage instructions
+========================
+
+The UBI volume to mount is specified using "ubiX_Y" or "ubiX:NAME" syntax,
+where "X" is UBI device number, "Y" is UBI volume number, and "NAME" is
+UBI volume name.
+
+Mount volume 0 on UBI device 0 to /mnt/ubifs:
+$ mount -t ubifs ubi0_0 /mnt/ubifs
+
+Mount "rootfs" volume of UBI device 0 to /mnt/ubifs ("rootfs" is volume
+name):
+$ mount -t ubifs ubi0:rootfs /mnt/ubifs
+
+The following is an example of the kernel boot arguments to attach mtd0
+to UBI and mount volume "rootfs":
+ubi.mtd=0 root=ubi0:rootfs rootfstype=ubifs
+
+
+Module Parameters for Debugging
+===============================
+
+When UBIFS has been compiled with debugging enabled, there are 3 module
+parameters that are available to control aspects of testing and debugging.
+The parameters are unsigned integers where each bit controls an option.
+The parameters are:
+
+debug_msgs	Selects which debug messages to display, as follows:
+
+		Message Type				Flag value
+
+		General messages			1
+		Journal messages			2
+		Mount messages				4
+		Commit messages				8
+		LEB search messages			16
+		Budgeting messages			32
+		Garbage collection messages		64
+		Tree Node Cache (TNC) messages		128
+		LEB properties (lprops) messages	256
+		Input/output messages			512
+		Log messages				1024
+		Scan messages				2048
+		Recovery messages			4096
+
+debug_chks	Selects extra checks that UBIFS can do while running:
+
+		Check					Flag value
+
+		General checks				1
+		Check Tree Node Cache (TNC)		2
+		Check indexing tree size		4
+		Check orphan area			8
+		Check old indexing tree			16
+		Check LEB properties (lprops)		32
+		Check leaf nodes and inodes		64
+
+debug_tsts	Selects a mode of testing, as follows:
+
+		Test mode				Flag value
+
+		Force in-the-gaps method		2
+		Failure mode for recovery testing	4
+
+For example, set debug_msgs to 5 to display General messages and Mount
+messages.
+
+
+References
+==========
+
+UBIFS documentation and FAQ/HOWTO at the MTD web site:
+http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/doc/ubifs.html
+http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/faq/ubifs.html

Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt

@@ -96,6 +96,14 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed
 			emulate the Windows 95 rule for create.
 		 Default setting is `lower'.
 
+tz=UTC        -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
+                 This option disables the conversion of timestamps
+                 between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC
+                 (which Linux uses internally).  This is particuluarly
+                 useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
+                 that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
+                 local time.
+
 <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false
 
 TODO

Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt

@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ struct file_system_type {
 
 The get_sb() method has the following arguments:
 
-  struct file_system_type *fs_type: decribes the filesystem, partly initialized
+  struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized
   	by the specific filesystem code
 
   int flags: mount flags
@@ -895,9 +895,9 @@ struct dentry_operations {
 	iput() yourself
 
   d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated.
-	Usefull for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay
+	Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay
 	pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created,
-	its done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably
+	it's done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably
 	dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global
 	dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is
 	held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless

Documentation/ftrace.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,1360 @@
+		ftrace - Function Tracer
+		========================
+
+Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc.
+   Author:   Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com>
+  License:   The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+Reviewers:   Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton,
+	     John Kacur, and David Teigland.
+
+Written for: 2.6.27-rc1
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+Ftrace is an internal tracer designed to help out developers and
+designers of systems to find what is going on inside the kernel.
+It can be used for debugging or analyzing latencies and performance
+issues that take place outside of user-space.
+
+Although ftrace is the function tracer, it also includes an
+infrastructure that allows for other types of tracing. Some of the
+tracers that are currently in ftrace include a tracer to trace
+context switches, the time it takes for a high priority task to
+run after it was woken up, the time interrupts are disabled, and
+more (ftrace allows for tracer plugins, which means that the list of
+tracers can always grow).
+
+
+The File System
+---------------
+
+Ftrace uses the debugfs file system to hold the control files as well
+as the files to display output.
+
+To mount the debugfs system:
+
+  # mkdir /debug
+  # mount -t debugfs nodev /debug
+
+(Note: it is more common to mount at /sys/kernel/debug, but for simplicity
+ this document will use /debug)
+
+That's it! (assuming that you have ftrace configured into your kernel)
+
+After mounting the debugfs, you can see a directory called
+"tracing".  This directory contains the control and output files
+of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
+
+
+ Note: all time values are in microseconds.
+
+  current_tracer : This is used to set or display the current tracer
+		that is configured.
+
+  available_tracers : This holds the different types of tracers that
+		have been compiled into the kernel. The tracers
+		listed here can be configured by echoing their name
+		into current_tracer.
+
+  tracing_enabled : This sets or displays whether the current_tracer
+		is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this
+		file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it.
+
+  trace : This file holds the output of the trace in a human readable
+		format (described below).
+
+  latency_trace : This file shows the same trace but the information
+		is organized more to display possible latencies
+		in the system (described below).
+
+  trace_pipe : The output is the same as the "trace" file but this
+		file is meant to be streamed with live tracing.
+		Reads from this file will block until new data
+		is retrieved. Unlike the "trace" and "latency_trace"
+		files, this file is a consumer. This means reading
+		from this file causes sequential reads to display
+		more current data. Once data is read from this
+		file, it is consumed, and will not be read
+		again with a sequential read. The "trace" and
+		"latency_trace" files are static, and if the
+		tracer is not adding more data, they will display
+		the same information every time they are read.
+
+  iter_ctrl : This file lets the user control the amount of data
+		that is displayed in one of the above output
+		files.
+
+  trace_max_latency : Some of the tracers record the max latency.
+		For example, the time interrupts are disabled.
+		This time is saved in this file. The max trace
+		will also be stored, and displayed by either
+		"trace" or "latency_trace".  A new max trace will
+		only be recorded if the latency is greater than
+		the value in this file. (in microseconds)
+
+  trace_entries : This sets or displays the number of trace
+		entries each CPU buffer can hold. The tracer buffers
+		are the same size for each CPU. The displayed number
+		is the size of the CPU buffer and not total size. The
+		trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory
+		that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size).
+		Since each entry is smaller than a page, if the last
+		allocated page has room for more entries than were
+		requested, the rest of the page is used to allocate
+		entries.
+
+		This can only be updated when the current_tracer
+		is set to "none".
+
+		NOTE: It is planned on changing the allocated buffers
+		      from being the number of possible CPUS to
+		      the number of online CPUS.
+
+  tracing_cpumask : This is a mask that lets the user only trace
+		on specified CPUS. The format is a hex string
+		representing the CPUS.
+
+  set_ftrace_filter : When dynamic ftrace is configured in (see the
+		section below "dynamic ftrace"), the code is dynamically
+		modified (code text rewrite) to disable calling of the
+		function profiler (mcount). This lets tracing be configured
+		in with practically no overhead in performance.  This also
+		has a side effect of enabling or disabling specific functions
+		to be traced. Echoing names of functions into this file
+		will limit the trace to only those functions.
+
+  set_ftrace_notrace: This has an effect opposite to that of
+		set_ftrace_filter. Any function that is added here will not
+		be traced. If a function exists in both set_ftrace_filter
+		and set_ftrace_notrace,	the function will _not_ be traced.
+
+  available_filter_functions : When a function is encountered the first
+		time by the dynamic tracer, it is recorded and
+		later the call is converted into a nop. This file
+		lists the functions that have been recorded
+		by the dynamic tracer and these functions can
+		be used to set the ftrace filter by the above
+		"set_ftrace_filter" file. (See the section "dynamic ftrace"
+		below for more details).
+
+
+The Tracers
+-----------
+
+Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured.
+
+  ftrace - function tracer that uses mcount to trace all functions.
+
+  sched_switch - traces the context switches between tasks.
+
+  irqsoff - traces the areas that disable interrupts and saves
+  		the trace with the longest max latency.
+		See tracing_max_latency.  When a new max is recorded,
+		it replaces the old trace. It is best to view this
+		trace via the latency_trace file.
+
+  preemptoff - Similar to irqsoff but traces and records the amount of
+		time for which preemption is disabled.
+
+  preemptirqsoff - Similar to irqsoff and preemptoff, but traces and
+		 records the largest time for which irqs and/or preemption
+		 is disabled.
+
+  wakeup - Traces and records the max latency that it takes for
+		the highest priority task to get scheduled after
+		it has been woken up.
+
+  none - This is not a tracer. To remove all tracers from tracing
+		simply echo "none" into current_tracer.
+
+
+Examples of using the tracer
+----------------------------
+
+Here are typical examples of using the tracers when controlling them only
+with the debugfs interface (without using any user-land utilities).
+
+Output format:
+--------------
+
+Here is an example of the output format of the file "trace"
+
+                             --------
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583854: path_put <-path_walk
+            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583855: dput <-path_put
+            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583855: _atomic_dec_and_lock <-dput
+                             --------
+
+A header is printed with the tracer name that is represented by the trace.
+In this case the tracer is "ftrace". Then a header showing the format. Task
+name "bash", the task PID "4251", the CPU that it was running on
+"01", the timestamp in <secs>.<usecs> format, the function name that was
+traced "path_put" and the parent function that called this function
+"path_walk". The timestamp is the time at which the function was
+entered.
+
+The sched_switch tracer also includes tracing of task wakeups and
+context switches.
+
+     ksoftirqd/1-7     [01]  1453.070013:      7:115:R   +  2916:115:S
+     ksoftirqd/1-7     [01]  1453.070013:      7:115:R   +    10:115:S
+     ksoftirqd/1-7     [01]  1453.070013:      7:115:R ==>    10:115:R
+        events/1-10    [01]  1453.070013:     10:115:S ==>  2916:115:R
+     kondemand/1-2916  [01]  1453.070013:   2916:115:S ==>     7:115:R
+     ksoftirqd/1-7     [01]  1453.070013:      7:115:S ==>     0:140:R
+
+Wake ups are represented by a "+" and the context switches are shown as
+"==>".  The format is:
+
+ Context switches:
+
+       Previous task              Next Task
+
+  <pid>:<prio>:<state>  ==>  <pid>:<prio>:<state>
+
+ Wake ups:
+
+       Current task               Task waking up
+
+  <pid>:<prio>:<state>    +  <pid>:<prio>:<state>
+
+The prio is the internal kernel priority, which is the inverse of the
+priority that is usually displayed by user-space tools. Zero represents
+the highest priority (99). Prio 100 starts the "nice" priorities with
+100 being equal to nice -20 and 139 being nice 19. The prio "140" is
+reserved for the idle task which is the lowest priority thread (pid 0).
+
+
+Latency trace format
+--------------------
+
+For traces that display latency times, the latency_trace file gives
+somewhat more information to see why a latency happened. Here is a typical
+trace.
+
+# tracer: irqsoff
+#
+irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 97 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: swapper-0 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: apic_timer_interrupt
+ => ended at:   do_softirq
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+  <idle>-0     0d..1    0us+: trace_hardirqs_off_thunk (apic_timer_interrupt)
+  <idle>-0     0d.s.   97us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
+  <idle>-0     0d.s1   98us : trace_hardirqs_on (do_softirq)
+
+
+
+This shows that the current tracer is "irqsoff" tracing the time for which
+interrupts were disabled. It gives the trace version and the version
+of the kernel upon which this was executed on (2.6.26-rc8). Then it displays
+the max latency in microsecs (97 us). The number of trace entries displayed
+and the total number recorded (both are three: #3/3). The type of
+preemption that was used (PREEMPT). VP, KP, SP, and HP are always zero
+and are reserved for later use. #P is the number of online CPUS (#P:2).
+
+The task is the process that was running when the latency occurred.
+(swapper pid: 0).
+
+The start and stop (the functions in which the interrupts were disabled and
+enabled respectively) that caused the latencies:
+
+  apic_timer_interrupt is where the interrupts were disabled.
+  do_softirq is where they were enabled again.
+
+The next lines after the header are the trace itself. The header
+explains which is which.
+
+  cmd: The name of the process in the trace.
+
+  pid: The PID of that process.
+
+  CPU#: The CPU which the process was running on.
+
+  irqs-off: 'd' interrupts are disabled. '.' otherwise.
+
+  need-resched: 'N' task need_resched is set, '.' otherwise.
+
+  hardirq/softirq:
+	'H' - hard irq occurred inside a softirq.
+	'h' - hard irq is running
+	's' - soft irq is running
+	'.' - normal context.
+
+  preempt-depth: The level of preempt_disabled
+
+The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers.
+
+  time: This differs from the trace file output. The trace file output
+	includes an absolute timestamp. The timestamp used by the
+	latency_trace file is relative to the start of the trace.
+
+  delay: This is just to help catch your eye a bit better. And
+	needs to be fixed to be only relative to the same CPU.
+	The marks are determined by the difference between this
+	current trace and the next trace.
+	 '!' - greater than preempt_mark_thresh (default 100)
+	 '+' - greater than 1 microsecond
+	 ' ' - less than or equal to 1 microsecond.
+
+  The rest is the same as the 'trace' file.
+
+
+iter_ctrl
+---------
+
+The iter_ctrl file is used to control what gets printed in the trace
+output. To see what is available, simply cat the file:
+
+  cat /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
+  print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \
+ noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree
+
+To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with "no".
+
+  echo noprint-parent > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
+
+To enable an option, leave off the "no".
+
+  echo sym-offset > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
+
+Here are the available options:
+
+  print-parent - On function traces, display the calling function
+		as well as the function being traced.
+
+  print-parent:
+   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul <-strict_strtoul
+
+  noprint-parent:
+   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul
+
+
+  sym-offset - Display not only the function name, but also the offset
+		in the function. For example, instead of seeing just
+		"ktime_get", you will see "ktime_get+0xb/0x20".
+
+  sym-offset:
+   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul+0x6/0xa0
+
+  sym-addr - this will also display the function address as well as
+		the function name.
+
+  sym-addr:
+   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul <c0339346>
+
+  verbose - This deals with the latency_trace file.
+
+    bash  4000 1 0 00000000 00010a95 [58127d26] 1720.415ms \
+    (+0.000ms): simple_strtoul (strict_strtoul)
+
+  raw - This will display raw numbers. This option is best for use with
+	user applications that can translate the raw numbers better than
+	having it done in the kernel.
+
+  hex - Similar to raw, but the numbers will be in a hexadecimal format.
+
+  bin - This will print out the formats in raw binary.
+
+  block - TBD (needs update)
+
+  stacktrace - This is one of the options that changes the trace itself.
+		When a trace is recorded, so is the stack of functions.
+		This allows for back traces of trace sites.
+
+  sched-tree - TBD (any users??)
+
+
+sched_switch
+------------
+
+This tracer simply records schedule switches. Here is an example
+of how to use it.
+
+ # echo sched_switch > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # sleep 1
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace
+
+# tracer: sched_switch
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132281:   3997:120:R   +  4055:120:R
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132284:   3997:120:R ==>  4055:120:R
+           sleep-4055  [01]   240.132371:   4055:120:S ==>  3997:120:R
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132454:   3997:120:R   +  4055:120:S
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132457:   3997:120:R ==>  4055:120:R
+           sleep-4055  [01]   240.132460:   4055:120:D ==>  3997:120:R
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132463:   3997:120:R   +  4055:120:D
+            bash-3997  [01]   240.132465:   3997:120:R ==>  4055:120:R
+          <idle>-0     [00]   240.132589:      0:140:R   +     4:115:S
+          <idle>-0     [00]   240.132591:      0:140:R ==>     4:115:R
+     ksoftirqd/0-4     [00]   240.132595:      4:115:S ==>     0:140:R
+          <idle>-0     [00]   240.132598:      0:140:R   +     4:115:S
+          <idle>-0     [00]   240.132599:      0:140:R ==>     4:115:R
+     ksoftirqd/0-4     [00]   240.132603:      4:115:S ==>     0:140:R
+           sleep-4055  [01]   240.133058:   4055:120:S ==>  3997:120:R
+ [...]
+
+
+As we have discussed previously about this format, the header shows
+the name of the trace and points to the options. The "FUNCTION"
+is a misnomer since here it represents the wake ups and context
+switches.
+
+The sched_switch file only lists the wake ups (represented with '+')
+and context switches ('==>') with the previous task or current task
+first followed by the next task or task waking up. The format for both
+of these is PID:KERNEL-PRIO:TASK-STATE. Remember that the KERNEL-PRIO
+is the inverse of the actual priority with zero (0) being the highest
+priority and the nice values starting at 100 (nice -20). Below is
+a quick chart to map the kernel priority to user land priorities.
+
+  Kernel priority: 0 to 99    ==> user RT priority 99 to 0
+  Kernel priority: 100 to 139 ==> user nice -20 to 19
+  Kernel priority: 140        ==> idle task priority
+
+The task states are:
+
+ R - running : wants to run, may not actually be running
+ S - sleep   : process is waiting to be woken up (handles signals)
+ D - disk sleep (uninterruptible sleep) : process must be woken up
+					(ignores signals)
+ T - stopped : process suspended
+ t - traced  : process is being traced (with something like gdb)
+ Z - zombie  : process waiting to be cleaned up
+ X - unknown
+
+
+ftrace_enabled
+--------------
+
+The following tracers (listed below) give different output depending
+on whether or not the sysctl ftrace_enabled is set. To set ftrace_enabled,
+one can either use the sysctl function or set it via the proc
+file system interface.
+
+  sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
+
+ or
+
+  echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/ftrace_enabled
+
+To disable ftrace_enabled simply replace the '1' with '0' in
+the above commands.
+
+When ftrace_enabled is set the tracers will also record the functions
+that are within the trace. The descriptions of the tracers
+will also show an example with ftrace enabled.
+
+
+irqsoff
+-------
+
+When interrupts are disabled, the CPU can not react to any other
+external event (besides NMIs and SMIs). This prevents the timer
+interrupt from triggering or the mouse interrupt from letting the
+kernel know of a new mouse event. The result is a latency with the
+reaction time.
+
+The irqsoff tracer tracks the time for which interrupts are disabled.
+When a new maximum latency is hit, the tracer saves the trace leading up
+to that latency point so that every time a new maximum is reached, the old
+saved trace is discarded and the new trace is saved.
+
+To reset the maximum, echo 0 into tracing_max_latency. Here is an
+example:
+
+ # echo irqsoff > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_max_latency
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # ls -ltr
+ [...]
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/latency_trace
+# tracer: irqsoff
+#
+irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 12 us, #3/3, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: bash-3730 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: sys_setpgid
+ => ended at:   sys_setpgid
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+    bash-3730  1d...    0us : _write_lock_irq (sys_setpgid)
+    bash-3730  1d..1    1us+: _write_unlock_irq (sys_setpgid)
+    bash-3730  1d..2   14us : trace_hardirqs_on (sys_setpgid)
+
+
+Here we see that that we had a latency of 12 microsecs (which is
+very good). The _write_lock_irq in sys_setpgid disabled interrupts.
+The difference between the 12 and the displayed timestamp 14us occurred
+because the clock was incremented between the time of recording the max
+latency and the time of recording the function that had that latency.
+
+Note the above example had ftrace_enabled not set. If we set the
+ftrace_enabled, we get a much larger output:
+
+# tracer: irqsoff
+#
+irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 50 us, #101/101, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: ls-4339 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: __alloc_pages_internal
+ => ended at:   __alloc_pages_internal
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+      ls-4339  0...1    0us+: get_page_from_freelist (__alloc_pages_internal)
+      ls-4339  0d..1    3us : rmqueue_bulk (get_page_from_freelist)
+      ls-4339  0d..1    3us : _spin_lock (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..1    4us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    4us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    5us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    5us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    6us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    6us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    7us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    7us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..2    8us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+[...]
+      ls-4339  0d..2   46us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   47us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   47us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   48us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   48us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   49us : _spin_unlock (rmqueue_bulk)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   49us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
+      ls-4339  0d..1   50us : get_page_from_freelist (__alloc_pages_internal)
+      ls-4339  0d..2   51us : trace_hardirqs_on (__alloc_pages_internal)
+
+
+
+Here we traced a 50 microsecond latency. But we also see all the
+functions that were called during that time. Note that by enabling
+function tracing, we incur an added overhead. This overhead may
+extend the latency times. But nevertheless, this trace has provided
+some very helpful debugging information.
+
+
+preemptoff
+----------
+
+When preemption is disabled, we may be able to receive interrupts but
+the task cannot be preempted and a higher priority task must wait
+for preemption to be enabled again before it can preempt a lower
+priority task.
+
+The preemptoff tracer traces the places that disable preemption.
+Like the irqsoff tracer, it records the maximum latency for which preemption
+was disabled. The control of preemptoff tracer is much like the irqsoff
+tracer.
+
+ # echo preemptoff > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_max_latency
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # ls -ltr
+ [...]
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/latency_trace
+# tracer: preemptoff
+#
+preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 29 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: do_IRQ
+ => ended at:   __do_softirq
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.    0us+: irq_enter (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.   29us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s1   30us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+
+
+This has some more changes. Preemption was disabled when an interrupt
+came in (notice the 'h'), and was enabled while doing a softirq.
+(notice the 's'). But we also see that interrupts have been disabled
+when entering the preempt off section and leaving it (the 'd').
+We do not know if interrupts were enabled in the mean time.
+
+# tracer: preemptoff
+#
+preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 63 us, #87/87, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: remove_wait_queue
+ => ended at:   __do_softirq
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    0us : _spin_lock_irqsave (remove_wait_queue)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    1us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (remove_wait_queue)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : do_IRQ (common_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : irq_enter (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1    3us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1    3us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.    4us : handle_fasteoi_irq (do_IRQ)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.   12us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   12us : ack_ioapic_quirk_irq (handle_fasteoi_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   13us : move_native_irq (ack_ioapic_quirk_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   13us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   14us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   14us : irq_exit (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   15us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   15us : do_softirq (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   15us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   16us : __local_bh_disable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   16us+: add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s4   20us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s4   21us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s5   21us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.s6   41us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s6   42us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s7   42us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s5   43us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s5   43us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s6   44us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s5   44us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s5   45us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.   63us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s1   64us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+
+
+The above is an example of the preemptoff trace with ftrace_enabled
+set. Here we see that interrupts were disabled the entire time.
+The irq_enter code lets us know that we entered an interrupt 'h'.
+Before that, the functions being traced still show that it is not
+in an interrupt, but we can see from the functions themselves that
+this is not the case.
+
+Notice that __do_softirq when called does not have a preempt_count.
+It may seem that we missed a preempt enabling. What really happened
+is that the preempt count is held on the thread's stack and we
+switched to the softirq stack (4K stacks in effect). The code
+does not copy the preempt count, but because interrupts are disabled,
+we do not need to worry about it. Having a tracer like this is good
+for letting people know what really happens inside the kernel.
+
+
+preemptirqsoff
+--------------
+
+Knowing the locations that have interrupts disabled or preemption
+disabled for the longest times is helpful. But sometimes we would
+like to know when either preemption and/or interrupts are disabled.
+
+Consider the following code:
+
+    local_irq_disable();
+    call_function_with_irqs_off();
+    preempt_disable();
+    call_function_with_irqs_and_preemption_off();
+    local_irq_enable();
+    call_function_with_preemption_off();
+    preempt_enable();
+
+The irqsoff tracer will record the total length of
+call_function_with_irqs_off() and
+call_function_with_irqs_and_preemption_off().
+
+The preemptoff tracer will record the total length of
+call_function_with_irqs_and_preemption_off() and
+call_function_with_preemption_off().
+
+But neither will trace the time that interrupts and/or preemption
+is disabled. This total time is the time that we can not schedule.
+To record this time, use the preemptirqsoff tracer.
+
+Again, using this trace is much like the irqsoff and preemptoff tracers.
+
+ # echo preemptirqsoff > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_max_latency
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # ls -ltr
+ [...]
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/latency_trace
+# tracer: preemptirqsoff
+#
+preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 293 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: ls-4860 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: apic_timer_interrupt
+ => ended at:   __do_softirq
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+      ls-4860  0d...    0us!: trace_hardirqs_off_thunk (apic_timer_interrupt)
+      ls-4860  0d.s.  294us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+      ls-4860  0d.s1  294us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+
+
+
+The trace_hardirqs_off_thunk is called from assembly on x86 when
+interrupts are disabled in the assembly code. Without the function
+tracing, we do not know if interrupts were enabled within the preemption
+points. We do see that it started with preemption enabled.
+
+Here is a trace with ftrace_enabled set:
+
+
+# tracer: preemptirqsoff
+#
+preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 105 us, #183/183, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+    -----------------
+ => started at: write_chan
+ => ended at:   __do_softirq
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+      ls-4473  0.N..    0us : preempt_schedule (write_chan)
+      ls-4473  0dN.1    1us : _spin_lock (schedule)
+      ls-4473  0dN.1    2us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
+      ls-4473  0d..2    2us : put_prev_task_fair (schedule)
+[...]
+      ls-4473  0d..2   13us : set_normalized_timespec (ktime_get_ts)
+      ls-4473  0d..2   13us : __switch_to (schedule)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   14us : finish_task_switch (schedule)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   14us : _spin_unlock_irq (finish_task_switch)
+    sshd-4261  0d..1   15us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock_irqsave)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   16us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (hrtick_set)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   16us : do_IRQ (common_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   17us : irq_enter (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   17us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d..2   18us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h2   18us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.   18us : handle_fasteoi_irq (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.   19us : _spin_lock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h.   19us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   20us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   20us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   28us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h1   29us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h2   29us : irq_exit (do_IRQ)
+    sshd-4261  0d.h2   29us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d..3   30us : do_softirq (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   30us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   31us : __local_bh_disable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d...   31us+: add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s4   34us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   43us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s4   44us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   44us : smp_apic_timer_interrupt (apic_timer_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   45us : irq_enter (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   45us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   46us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   46us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   47us : hrtimer_interrupt (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   47us : ktime_get (hrtimer_interrupt)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   81us : tick_program_event (hrtimer_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   82us : ktime_get (tick_program_event)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   82us : ktime_get_ts (ktime_get)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   83us : getnstimeofday (ktime_get_ts)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   83us : set_normalized_timespec (ktime_get_ts)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   84us : clockevents_program_event (tick_program_event)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   84us : lapic_next_event (clockevents_program_event)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   85us : irq_exit (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
+    sshd-4261  0d.H3   85us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s4   86us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s3   86us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+[...]
+    sshd-4261  0d.s1   98us : sub_preempt_count (net_rx_action)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.   99us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock_irq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s1   99us+: _spin_unlock_irq (run_timer_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.  104us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.  104us : sub_preempt_count (_local_bh_enable)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s.  105us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+    sshd-4261  0d.s1  105us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+
+
+This is a very interesting trace. It started with the preemption of
+the ls task. We see that the task had the "need_resched" bit set
+via the 'N' in the trace.  Interrupts were disabled before the spin_lock
+at the beginning of the trace. We see that a schedule took place to run
+sshd.  When the interrupts were enabled, we took an interrupt.
+On return from the interrupt handler, the softirq ran. We took another
+interrupt while running the softirq as we see from the capital 'H'.
+
+
+wakeup
+------
+
+In a Real-Time environment it is very important to know the wakeup
+time it takes for the highest priority task that is woken up to the
+time that it executes. This is also known as "schedule latency".
+I stress the point that this is about RT tasks. It is also important
+to know the scheduling latency of non-RT tasks, but the average
+schedule latency is better for non-RT tasks. Tools like
+LatencyTop are more appropriate for such measurements.
+
+Real-Time environments are interested in the worst case latency.
+That is the longest latency it takes for something to happen, and
+not the average. We can have a very fast scheduler that may only
+have a large latency once in a while, but that would not work well
+with Real-Time tasks.  The wakeup tracer was designed to record
+the worst case wakeups of RT tasks. Non-RT tasks are not recorded
+because the tracer only records one worst case and tracing non-RT
+tasks that are unpredictable will overwrite the worst case latency
+of RT tasks.
+
+Since this tracer only deals with RT tasks, we will run this slightly
+differently than we did with the previous tracers. Instead of performing
+an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under 'chrt' which changes the
+priority of the task.
+
+ # echo wakeup > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_max_latency
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # chrt -f 5 sleep 1
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/latency_trace
+# tracer: wakeup
+#
+wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 4 us, #2/2, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: sleep-4901 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:1 rt_prio:5)
+    -----------------
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+  <idle>-0     1d.h4    0us+: try_to_wake_up (wake_up_process)
+  <idle>-0     1d..4    4us : schedule (cpu_idle)
+
+
+
+Running this on an idle system, we see that it only took 4 microseconds
+to perform the task switch.  Note, since the trace marker in the
+schedule is before the actual "switch", we stop the tracing when
+the recorded task is about to schedule in. This may change if
+we add a new marker at the end of the scheduler.
+
+Notice that the recorded task is 'sleep' with the PID of 4901 and it
+has an rt_prio of 5. This priority is user-space priority and not
+the internal kernel priority. The policy is 1 for SCHED_FIFO and 2
+for SCHED_RR.
+
+Doing the same with chrt -r 5 and ftrace_enabled set.
+
+# tracer: wakeup
+#
+wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+ latency: 50 us, #60/60, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
+    -----------------
+    | task: sleep-4068 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:2 rt_prio:5)
+    -----------------
+
+#                _------=> CPU#
+#               / _-----=> irqs-off
+#              | / _----=> need-resched
+#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
+#              |||| /
+#              |||||     delay
+#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
+#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    0us : try_to_wake_up (wake_up_process)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H4    1us : sub_preempt_count (marker_probe_cb)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    2us : check_preempt_wakeup (try_to_wake_up)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    3us : update_curr (check_preempt_wakeup)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    4us : calc_delta_mine (update_curr)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    5us : __resched_task (check_preempt_wakeup)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    6us : task_wake_up_rt (try_to_wake_up)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    7us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (try_to_wake_up)
+[...]
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H2   17us : irq_exit (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.H2   18us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.s3   19us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
+ksoftirq-7     1..s2   20us : rcu_process_callbacks (__do_softirq)
+[...]
+ksoftirq-7     1..s2   26us : __rcu_process_callbacks (rcu_process_callbacks)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.s2   27us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
+ksoftirq-7     1d.s2   28us : sub_preempt_count (_local_bh_enable)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.3   29us : sub_preempt_count (ksoftirqd)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   30us : _cond_resched (ksoftirqd)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   31us : __cond_resched (_cond_resched)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   32us : add_preempt_count (__cond_resched)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   33us : schedule (__cond_resched)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   33us : add_preempt_count (schedule)
+ksoftirq-7     1.N.3   34us : hrtick_clear (schedule)
+ksoftirq-7     1dN.3   35us : _spin_lock (schedule)
+ksoftirq-7     1dN.3   36us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..4   37us : put_prev_task_fair (schedule)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..4   38us : update_curr (put_prev_task_fair)
+[...]
+ksoftirq-7     1d..5   47us : _spin_trylock (tracing_record_cmdline)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..5   48us : add_preempt_count (_spin_trylock)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..6   49us : _spin_unlock (tracing_record_cmdline)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..6   49us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
+ksoftirq-7     1d..4   50us : schedule (__cond_resched)
+
+The interrupt went off while running ksoftirqd. This task runs at
+SCHED_OTHER. Why did not we see the 'N' set early? This may be
+a harmless bug with x86_32 and 4K stacks. On x86_32 with 4K stacks
+configured, the interrupt and softirq run with their own stack.
+Some information is held on the top of the task's stack (need_resched
+and preempt_count are both stored there). The setting of the NEED_RESCHED
+bit is done directly to the task's stack, but the reading of the
+NEED_RESCHED is done by looking at the current stack, which in this case
+is the stack for the hard interrupt. This hides the fact that NEED_RESCHED
+has been set. We do not see the 'N' until we switch back to the task's
+assigned stack.
+
+ftrace
+------
+
+ftrace is not only the name of the tracing infrastructure, but it
+is also a name of one of the tracers. The tracer is the function
+tracer. Enabling the function tracer can be done from the
+debug file system. Make sure the ftrace_enabled is set otherwise
+this tracer is a nop.
+
+ # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
+ # echo ftrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # usleep 1
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638713: finish_task_switch <-schedule
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638714: _spin_unlock_irq <-finish_task_switch
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638714: sub_preempt_count <-_spin_unlock_irq
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638715: hrtick_set <-schedule
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638715: _spin_lock_irqsave <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638716: add_preempt_count <-_spin_lock_irqsave
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638716: _spin_unlock_irqrestore <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638717: sub_preempt_count <-_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638717: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638718: sub_preempt_count <-schedule
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638718: sub_preempt_count <-preempt_schedule
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638719: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638719: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638720: _spin_lock_irq <-wait_for_common
+            bash-4003  [00]   123.638720: add_preempt_count <-_spin_lock_irq
+[...]
+
+
+Note: ftrace uses ring buffers to store the above entries. The newest data
+may overwrite the oldest data. Sometimes using echo to stop the trace
+is not sufficient because the tracing could have overwritten the data
+that you wanted to record. For this reason, it is sometimes better to
+disable tracing directly from a program. This allows you to stop the
+tracing at the point that you hit the part that you are interested in.
+To disable the tracing directly from a C program, something like following
+code snippet can be used:
+
+int trace_fd;
+[...]
+int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
+	[...]
+	trace_fd = open("/debug/tracing/tracing_enabled", O_WRONLY);
+	[...]
+	if (condition_hit()) {
+		write(trace_fd, "0", 1);
+	}
+	[...]
+}
+
+Note: Here we hard coded the path name. The debugfs mount is not
+guaranteed to be at /debug (and is more commonly at /sys/kernel/debug).
+For simple one time traces, the above is sufficent. For anything else,
+a search through /proc/mounts may be needed to find where the debugfs
+file-system is mounted.
+
+dynamic ftrace
+--------------
+
+If CONFIG_DYNAMIC_FTRACE is set, the system will run with
+virtually no overhead when function tracing is disabled. The way
+this works is the mcount function call (placed at the start of
+every kernel function, produced by the -pg switch in gcc), starts
+of pointing to a simple return. (Enabling FTRACE will include the
+-pg switch in the compiling of the kernel.)
+
+When dynamic ftrace is initialized, it calls kstop_machine to make
+the machine act like a uniprocessor so that it can freely modify code
+without worrying about other processors executing that same code.  At
+initialization, the mcount calls are changed to call a "record_ip"
+function.  After this, the first time a kernel function is called,
+it has the calling address saved in a hash table.
+
+Later on the ftraced kernel thread is awoken and will again call
+kstop_machine if new functions have been recorded. The ftraced thread
+will change all calls to mcount to "nop".  Just calling mcount
+and having mcount return has shown a 10% overhead. By converting
+it to a nop, there is no measurable overhead to the system.
+
+One special side-effect to the recording of the functions being
+traced is that we can now selectively choose which functions we
+wish to trace and which ones we want the mcount calls to remain as
+nops.
+
+Two files are used, one for enabling and one for disabling the tracing
+of specified functions. They are:
+
+  set_ftrace_filter
+
+and
+
+  set_ftrace_notrace
+
+A list of available functions that you can add to these files is listed
+in:
+
+   available_filter_functions
+
+ # cat /debug/tracing/available_filter_functions
+put_prev_task_idle
+kmem_cache_create
+pick_next_task_rt
+get_online_cpus
+pick_next_task_fair
+mutex_lock
+[...]
+
+If I am only interested in sys_nanosleep and hrtimer_interrupt:
+
+ # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \
+		> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+ # echo ftrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # usleep 1
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+          usleep-4134  [00]  1317.070017: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+          usleep-4134  [00]  1317.070111: sys_nanosleep <-syscall_call
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1317.070115: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+
+To see which functions are being traced, you can cat the file:
+
+ # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+hrtimer_interrupt
+sys_nanosleep
+
+
+Perhaps this is not enough. The filters also allow simple wild cards.
+Only the following are currently available
+
+  <match>*  - will match functions that begin with <match>
+  *<match>  - will match functions that end with <match>
+  *<match>* - will match functions that have <match> in it
+
+These are the only wild cards which are supported.
+
+  <match>*<match> will not work.
+
+ # echo hrtimer_* > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+
+Produces:
+
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611794: hrtimer_init <-copy_process
+            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611941: hrtimer_start <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611956: hrtimer_cancel <-hrtick_clear
+            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611956: hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612019: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612025: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612032: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612037: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612382: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+
+
+Notice that we lost the sys_nanosleep.
+
+ # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+hrtimer_run_queues
+hrtimer_run_pending
+hrtimer_init
+hrtimer_cancel
+hrtimer_try_to_cancel
+hrtimer_forward
+hrtimer_start
+hrtimer_reprogram
+hrtimer_force_reprogram
+hrtimer_get_next_event
+hrtimer_interrupt
+hrtimer_nanosleep
+hrtimer_wakeup
+hrtimer_get_remaining
+hrtimer_get_res
+hrtimer_init_sleeper
+
+
+This is because the '>' and '>>' act just like they do in bash.
+To rewrite the filters, use '>'
+To append to the filters, use '>>'
+
+To clear out a filter so that all functions will be recorded again:
+
+ # echo > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+ # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+ #
+
+Again, now we want to append.
+
+ # echo sys_nanosleep > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+ # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+sys_nanosleep
+ # echo hrtimer_* >> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+ # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
+hrtimer_run_queues
+hrtimer_run_pending
+hrtimer_init
+hrtimer_cancel
+hrtimer_try_to_cancel
+hrtimer_forward
+hrtimer_start
+hrtimer_reprogram
+hrtimer_force_reprogram
+hrtimer_get_next_event
+hrtimer_interrupt
+sys_nanosleep
+hrtimer_nanosleep
+hrtimer_wakeup
+hrtimer_get_remaining
+hrtimer_get_res
+hrtimer_init_sleeper
+
+
+The set_ftrace_notrace prevents those functions from being traced.
+
+ # echo '*preempt*' '*lock*' > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_notrace
+
+Produces:
+
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281644: finish_task_switch <-schedule
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281645: hrtick_set <-schedule
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281645: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281646: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281647: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281647: kthread_stop <-stop_machine_run
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281648: init_waitqueue_head <-kthread_stop
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281648: wake_up_process <-kthread_stop
+            bash-4043  [01]   115.281649: try_to_wake_up <-wake_up_process
+
+We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing.
+
+ftraced
+-------
+
+As mentioned above, when dynamic ftrace is configured in, a kernel
+thread wakes up once a second and checks to see if there are mcount
+calls that need to be converted into nops. If there are not any, then
+it simply goes back to sleep. But if there are some, it will call
+kstop_machine to convert the calls to nops.
+
+There may be a case in which you do not want this added latency.
+Perhaps you are doing some audio recording and this activity might
+cause skips in the playback. There is an interface to disable
+and enable the "ftraced" kernel thread.
+
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/ftraced_enabled
+
+This will disable the calling of kstop_machine to update the
+mcount calls to nops. Remember that there is a large overhead
+to calling mcount. Without this kernel thread, that overhead will
+exist.
+
+If there are recorded calls to mcount, any write to the ftraced_enabled
+file will cause the kstop_machine to run. This means that a
+user can manually perform the updates when they want to by simply
+echoing a '0' into the ftraced_enabled file.
+
+The updates are also done at the beginning of enabling a tracer
+that uses ftrace function recording.
+
+
+trace_pipe
+----------
+
+The trace_pipe outputs the same content as the trace file, but the effect
+on the tracing is different. Every read from trace_pipe is consumed.
+This means that subsequent reads will be different. The trace
+is live.
+
+ # echo ftrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out &
+[1] 4153
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # usleep 1
+ # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace
+# tracer: ftrace
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |      |          |         |
+
+ #
+ # cat /tmp/trace.out
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267106: finish_task_switch <-schedule
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267106: hrtick_set <-schedule
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267107: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267108: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267108: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267109: kthread_stop <-stop_machine_run
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267109: init_waitqueue_head <-kthread_stop
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267110: wake_up_process <-kthread_stop
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267110: try_to_wake_up <-wake_up_process
+            bash-4043  [00] 41.267111: select_task_rq_rt <-try_to_wake_up
+
+
+Note, reading the trace_pipe file will block until more input is added.
+By changing the tracer, trace_pipe will issue an EOF. We needed
+to set the ftrace tracer _before_ cating the trace_pipe file.
+
+
+trace entries
+-------------
+
+Having too much or not enough data can be troublesome in diagnosing
+an issue in the kernel. The file trace_entries is used to modify
+the size of the internal trace buffers. The number listed
+is the number of entries that can be recorded per CPU. To know
+the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUS with the
+number of entries.
+
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+65620
+
+Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that,
+echo "none" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set
+to "none", an EINVAL error will be returned.
+
+ # echo none > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
+ # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+100045
+
+
+Notice that we echoed in 100,000 but the size is 100,045. The entries
+are held in individual pages. It allocates the number of pages it takes
+to fulfill the request. If more entries may fit on the last page
+then they will be added.
+
+ # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+85
+
+This shows us that 85 entries can fit in a single page.
+
+The number of pages which will be allocated is limited to a percentage
+of available memory. Allocating too much will produce an error.
+
+ # echo 1000000000000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+-bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory
+ # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
+85
+

Documentation/gpio.txt

@@ -347,15 +347,12 @@ necessarily be nonportable.
 Dynamic definition of GPIOs is not currently standard; for example, as
 a side effect of configuring an add-on board with some GPIO expanders.
 
-These calls are purely for kernel space, but a userspace API could be built
-on top of them.
-
 
 GPIO implementor's framework (OPTIONAL)
 =======================================
 As noted earlier, there is an optional implementation framework making it
 easier for platforms to support different kinds of GPIO controller using
-the same programming interface.
+the same programming interface.  This framework is called "gpiolib".
 
 As a debugging aid, if debugfs is available a /sys/kernel/debug/gpio file
 will be found there.  That will list all the controllers registered through
@@ -392,11 +389,21 @@ either NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested.
 
 Platform Support
 ----------------
-To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select HAVE_GPIO_LIB"
+To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select" either
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
 and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines
 three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep().
 They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS.
 
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpio-lib code will always get compiled
+into the kernel on that architecture.
+
+ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpio-lib code defaults to off and the user
+can enable it and build it into the kernel optionally.
+
+If neither of these options are selected, the platform does not support
+GPIOs through GPIO-lib and the code cannot be enabled by the user.
+
 Trivial implementations of those functions can directly use framework
 code, which always dispatches through the gpio_chip:
 
@@ -439,4 +446,120 @@ becomes available.  That may mean the device should not be registered until
 calls for that GPIO can work.  One way to address such dependencies is for
 such gpio_chip controllers to provide setup() and teardown() callbacks to
 board specific code; those board specific callbacks would register devices
-once all the necessary resources are available.
+once all the necessary resources are available, and remove them later when
+the GPIO controller device becomes unavailable.
+
+
+Sysfs Interface for Userspace (OPTIONAL)
+========================================
+Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to
+configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs.  This is different from the
+debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and
+value instead of just showing a gpio state summary.  Plus, it could be
+present on production systems without debugging support.
+
+Given approprate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could
+know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to
+protect boot loader segments in flash memory.  System upgrade procedures
+may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO,
+then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling
+the write protection.  In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched,
+and the kernel would have no need to know about it.
+
+Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems
+userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that
+standard kernels won't know about.  And for some tasks, simple userspace
+GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs.
+
+Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons"
+GPIO tasks:  "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively.  Use those
+instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel
+frameworks better than your userspace code could.
+
+
+Paths in Sysfs
+--------------
+There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio:
+
+   -	Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs;
+
+   -	GPIOs themselves; and
+
+   -	GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances).
+
+That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink.
+
+The control interfaces are write-only:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/
+
+    	"export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
+		a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file.
+
+		Example:  "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node
+		for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code.
+
+    	"unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
+
+		Example:  "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19"
+		node exported using the "export" file.
+
+GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42)
+and have the following read/write attributes:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
+
+	"direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out".  This value may
+		normally be written.  Writing as "out" defaults to
+		initializing the value as low.  To ensure glitch free
+		operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to
+		configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value.
+
+		Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel
+		doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or
+		it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly
+		allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction.
+
+	"value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high).  If the GPIO
+		is configured as an output, this value may be written;
+		any nonzero value is treated as high.
+
+GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/chipchip42/ (for the
+controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following
+read-only attributes:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
+
+    	"base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
+
+    	"label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
+
+    	"ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1)
+
+Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for
+what purposes.  However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on
+a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used,
+or other cards in the stack.  In such cases, you may need to use the
+gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine
+the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal.
+
+
+Exporting from Kernel code
+--------------------------
+Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been
+requested using gpio_request():
+
+	/* export the GPIO to userspace */
+	int gpio_export(unsigned gpio, bool direction_may_change);
+
+	/* reverse gpio_export() */
+	void gpio_unexport();
+
+After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in
+the sysfs interface by gpio_export().  The driver can control whether the
+signal direction may change.  This helps drivers prevent userspace code
+from accidentally clobbering important system state.
+
+This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds
+of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's
+suitable for documenting as part of a board support package.

Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface

@@ -2,17 +2,12 @@ Naming and data format standards for sysfs files
 ------------------------------------------------
 
 The libsensors library offers an interface to the raw sensors data
-through the sysfs interface. See libsensors documentation and source for
-further information. As of writing this document, libsensors
-(from lm_sensors 2.8.3) is heavily chip-dependent. Adding or updating
-support for any given chip requires modifying the library's code.
-This is because libsensors was written for the procfs interface
-older kernel modules were using, which wasn't standardized enough.
-Recent versions of libsensors (from lm_sensors 2.8.2 and later) have
-support for the sysfs interface, though.
-
-The new sysfs interface was designed to be as chip-independent as
-possible.
+through the sysfs interface. Since lm-sensors 3.0.0, libsensors is
+completely chip-independent. It assumes that all the kernel drivers
+implement the standard sysfs interface described in this document.
+This makes adding or updating support for any given chip very easy, as
+libsensors, and applications using it, do not need to be modified.
+This is a major improvement compared to lm-sensors 2.
 
 Note that motherboards vary widely in the connections to sensor chips.
 There is no standard that ensures, for example, that the second
@@ -35,19 +30,17 @@ access this data in a simple and consistent way. That said, such programs
 will have to implement conversion, labeling and hiding of inputs. For
 this reason, it is still not recommended to bypass the library.
 
-If you are developing a userspace application please send us feedback on
-this standard.
-
-Note that this standard isn't completely established yet, so it is subject
-to changes. If you are writing a new hardware monitoring driver those
-features can't seem to fit in this interface, please contact us with your
-extension proposal. Keep in mind that backward compatibility must be
-preserved.
-
 Each chip gets its own directory in the sysfs /sys/devices tree.  To
 find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the device symlinks from
 /sys/class/hwmon/hwmon*.
 
+Up to lm-sensors 3.0.0, libsensors looks for hardware monitoring attributes
+in the "physical" device directory. Since lm-sensors 3.0.1, attributes found
+in the hwmon "class" device directory are also supported. Complex drivers
+(e.g. drivers for multifunction chips) may want to use this possibility to
+avoid namespace pollution. The only drawback will be that older versions of
+libsensors won't support the driver in question.
+
 All sysfs values are fixed point numbers.
 
 There is only one value per file, unlike the older /proc specification.

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i810

@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver i2c-i810
-
-Supported adapters:
-  * Intel 82810, 82810-DC100, 82810E, and 82815 (GMCH)
-  * Intel 82845G (GMCH)
-
-Authors: 
-	Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, 
-	Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
-        Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
-	Ralph Metzler <rjkm@thp.uni-koeln.de>,
-	Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
-
-Main contact: Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
-
-Description 
------------ 
-
-WARNING: If you have an '810' or '815' motherboard, your standard I2C
-temperature sensors are most likely on the 801's I2C bus. You want the
-i2c-i801 driver for those, not this driver.
-
-Now for the i2c-i810...
-
-The GMCH chip contains two I2C interfaces.
-
-The first interface is used for DDC (Data Display Channel) which is a
-serial channel through the VGA monitor connector to a DDC-compliant
-monitor. This interface is defined by the Video Electronics Standards
-Association (VESA). The standards are available for purchase at
-http://www.vesa.org .
-
-The second interface is a general-purpose I2C bus. It may be connected to a
-TV-out chip such as the BT869 or possibly to a digital flat-panel display.
-
-Features
--------- 
-
-Both busses use the i2c-algo-bit driver for 'bit banging'
-and support for specific transactions is provided by i2c-algo-bit.
-
-Issues
-------
-
-If you enable bus testing in i2c-algo-bit (insmod i2c-algo-bit bit_test=1),
-the test may fail; if so, the i2c-i810 driver won't be inserted. However,
-we think this has been fixed.

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-prosavage

@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver i2c-prosavage
-
-Supported adapters:
-	
-	S3/VIA KM266/VT8375 aka ProSavage8 
-	S3/VIA KM133/VT8365 aka Savage4 
-
-Author: Henk Vergonet <henk@god.dyndns.org>
-
-Description
------------
-
-The Savage4 chips contain two I2C interfaces (aka a I2C 'master' or
-'host'). 
-
-The first interface is used for DDC (Data Display Channel) which is a
-serial channel through the VGA monitor connector to a DDC-compliant
-monitor. This interface is defined by the Video Electronics Standards
-Association (VESA). The standards are available for purchase at
-http://www.vesa.org . The second interface is a general-purpose I2C bus.
-
-Usefull for gaining access to the TV Encoder chips.
-

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-savage4

@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver i2c-savage4
-
-Supported adapters:
-  * Savage4
-  * Savage2000
-
-Authors: 
-	Alexander Wold <awold@bigfoot.com>,
-	Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> 
-
-Description
------------
-
-The Savage4 chips contain two I2C interfaces (aka a I2C 'master'
-or 'host'). 
-
-The first interface is used for DDC (Data Display Channel) which is a
-serial channel through the VGA monitor connector to a DDC-compliant
-monitor. This interface is defined by the Video Electronics Standards
-Association (VESA). The standards are available for purchase at
-http://www.vesa.org . The DDC bus is not yet supported because its register
-is not directly memory-mapped.
-
-The second interface is a general-purpose I2C bus. This is the only
-interface supported by the driver at the moment.
-

Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ $ modprobe max6875 force=0,0x50
 
 The MAX6874/MAX6875 ignores address bit 0, so this driver attaches to multiple
 addresses.  For example, for address 0x50, it also reserves 0x51.
-The even-address instance is called 'max6875', the odd one is 'max6875 subclient'.
+The even-address instance is called 'max6875', the odd one is 'dummy'.
 
 
 Programming the chip using i2c-dev

Documentation/i2c/chips/pca9539

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ drivers/gpio/pca9539.c instead.
 Supported chips:
   * Philips PCA9539
     Prefix: 'pca9539'
-    Addresses scanned: 0x74 - 0x77
+    Addresses scanned: none
     Datasheet:
         http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/acrobat/datasheets/PCA9539_2.pdf
 
@@ -23,6 +23,14 @@ The input sense can also be inverted.
 The 16 lines are split between two bytes.
 
 
+Detection
+---------
+
+The PCA9539 is difficult to detect and not commonly found in PC machines,
+so you have to pass the I2C bus and address of the installed PCA9539
+devices explicitly to the driver at load time via the force=... parameter.
+
+
 Sysfs entries
 -------------
 

Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574

@@ -4,13 +4,13 @@ Kernel driver pcf8574
 Supported chips:
   * Philips PCF8574
     Prefix: 'pcf8574'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x27
+    Addresses scanned: none
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website
                http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html
 
  * Philips PCF8574A
     Prefix: 'pcf8574a'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x38 - 0x3f
+    Addresses scanned: none
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website
                http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html
 
@@ -38,12 +38,10 @@ For more informations see the datasheet.
 Accessing PCF8574(A) via /sys interface
 -------------------------------------
 
-! Be careful !
 The PCF8574(A) is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip.
-So every chip with address in the interval [20..27] and [38..3f] are
-detected as PCF8574(A). If you have other chips in this address
-range, the workaround is to load this module after the one
-for your others chips.
+So, you have to pass the I2C bus and address of the installed PCF857A
+and PCF8574A devices explicitly to the driver at load time via the
+force=... parameter.
 
 On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being
 created for each detected PCF8574(A):

Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8575

@@ -40,12 +40,9 @@ Detection
 ---------
 
 There is no method known to detect whether a chip on a given I2C address is
-a PCF8575 or whether it is any other I2C device. So there are two alternatives
-to let the driver find the installed PCF8575 devices:
-- Load this driver after any other I2C driver for I2C devices with addresses
-  in the range 0x20 .. 0x27.
-- Pass the I2C bus and address of the installed PCF8575 devices explicitly to
-  the driver at load time via the probe=... or force=... parameters.
+a PCF8575 or whether it is any other I2C device, so you have to pass the I2C
+bus and address of the installed PCF8575 devices explicitly to the driver at
+load time via the force=... parameter.
 
 /sys interface
 --------------

Documentation/i2c/fault-codes

@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+This is a summary of the most important conventions for use of fault
+codes in the I2C/SMBus stack.
+
+
+A "Fault" is not always an "Error"
+----------------------------------
+Not all fault reports imply errors; "page faults" should be a familiar
+example.  Software often retries idempotent operations after transient
+faults.  There may be fancier recovery schemes that are appropriate in
+some cases, such as re-initializing (and maybe resetting).  After such
+recovery, triggered by a fault report, there is no error.
+
+In a similar way, sometimes a "fault" code just reports one defined
+result for an operation ... it doesn't indicate that anything is wrong
+at all, just that the outcome wasn't on the "golden path".
+
+In short, your I2C driver code may need to know these codes in order
+to respond correctly.  Other code may need to rely on YOUR code reporting
+the right fault code, so that it can (in turn) behave correctly.
+
+
+I2C and SMBus fault codes
+-------------------------
+These are returned as negative numbers from most calls, with zero or
+some positive number indicating a non-fault return.  The specific
+numbers associated with these symbols differ between architectures,
+though most Linux systems use <asm-generic/errno*.h> numbering.
+
+Note that the descriptions here are not exhaustive.  There are other
+codes that may be returned, and other cases where these codes should
+be returned.  However, drivers should not return other codes for these
+cases (unless the hardware doesn't provide unique fault reports).
+
+Also, codes returned by adapter probe methods follow rules which are
+specific to their host bus (such as PCI, or the platform bus).
+
+
+EAGAIN
+	Returned by I2C adapters when they lose arbitration in master
+	transmit mode:  some other master was transmitting different
+	data at the same time.
+
+	Also returned when trying to invoke an I2C operation in an
+	atomic context, when some task is already using that I2C bus
+	to execute some other operation.
+
+EBADMSG
+	Returned by SMBus logic when an invalid Packet Error Code byte
+	is received.  This code is a CRC covering all bytes in the
+	transaction, and is sent before the terminating STOP.  This
+	fault is only reported on read transactions; the SMBus slave
+	may have a way to report PEC mismatches on writes from the
+	host.  Note that even if PECs are in use, you should not rely
+	on these as the only way to detect incorrect data transfers.
+
+EBUSY
+	Returned by SMBus adapters when the bus was busy for longer
+	than allowed.  This usually indicates some device (maybe the
+	SMBus adapter) needs some fault recovery (such as resetting),
+	or that the reset was attempted but failed.
+
+EINVAL
+	This rather vague error means an invalid parameter has been
+	detected before any I/O operation was started.  Use a more
+	specific fault code when you can.
+
+	One example would be a driver trying an SMBus Block Write
+	with block size outside the range of 1-32 bytes.
+
+EIO
+	This rather vague error means something went wrong when
+	performing an I/O operation.  Use a more specific fault
+	code when you can.
+
+ENODEV
+	Returned by driver probe() methods.  This is a bit more
+	specific than ENXIO, implying the problem isn't with the
+	address, but with the device found there.  Driver probes
+	may verify the device returns *correct* responses, and
+	return this as appropriate.  (The driver core will warn
+	about probe faults other than ENXIO and ENODEV.)
+
+ENOMEM
+	Returned by any component that can't allocate memory when
+	it needs to do so.
+
+ENXIO
+	Returned by I2C adapters to indicate that the address phase
+	of a transfer didn't get an ACK.  While it might just mean
+	an I2C device was temporarily not responding, usually it
+	means there's nothing listening at that address.
+
+	Returned by driver probe() methods to indicate that they
+	found no device to bind to.  (ENODEV may also be used.)
+
+EOPNOTSUPP
+	Returned by an adapter when asked to perform an operation
+	that it doesn't, or can't, support.
+
+	For example, this would be returned when an adapter that
+	doesn't support SMBus block transfers is asked to execute
+	one.  In that case, the driver making that request should
+	have verified that functionality was supported before it
+	made that block transfer request.
+
+	Similarly, if an I2C adapter can't execute all legal I2C
+	messages, it should return this when asked to perform a
+	transaction it can't.  (These limitations can't be seen in
+	the adapter's functionality mask, since the assumption is
+	that if an adapter supports I2C it supports all of I2C.)
+
+EPROTO
+	Returned when slave does not conform to the relevant I2C
+	or SMBus (or chip-specific) protocol specifications.  One
+	case is when the length of an SMBus block data response
+	(from the SMBus slave) is outside the range 1-32 bytes.
+
+ETIMEDOUT
+	This is returned by drivers when an operation took too much
+	time, and was aborted before it completed.
+
+	SMBus adapters may return it when an operation took more
+	time than allowed by the SMBus specification; for example,
+	when a slave stretches clocks too far.  I2C has no such
+	timeouts, but it's normal for I2C adapters to impose some
+	arbitrary limits (much longer than SMBus!) too.
+

Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol

@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ Count (8 bits): A data byte containing the length of a block operation.
 [..]: Data sent by I2C device, as opposed to data sent by the host adapter.
 
 
-SMBus Quick Command:  i2c_smbus_write_quick()
-=============================================
+SMBus Quick Command
+===================
 
 This sends a single bit to the device, at the place of the Rd/Wr bit.
 

Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients

@@ -0,0 +1,281 @@
+Upgrading I2C Drivers to the new 2.6 Driver Model
+=================================================
+
+Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This guide outlines how to alter existing Linux 2.6 client drivers from
+the old to the new new binding methods.
+
+
+Example old-style driver
+------------------------
+
+
+struct example_state {
+	struct i2c_client	client;
+	....
+};
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver;
+
+static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END };
+static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END };
+
+I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD;
+
+static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind)
+{
+	struct example_state *state;
+	struct device *dev = &adap->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
+	int ret;
+
+	state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+	if (state == NULL) {
+		dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+		return -ENOMEM;
+	}
+
+	example->client.addr    = addr;
+	example->client.flags   = 0;
+	example->client.adapter = adap;
+
+	i2c_set_clientdata(&state->i2c_client, state);
+	strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE);
+
+	ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client);
+	if (ret < 0) {
+		dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n");
+		kfree(state);
+		return ret;
+	}
+
+	dev = &state->i2c_client.dev;
+
+	/* rest of the initialisation goes here. */
+
+	dev_info(dev, "example client created\n");
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+	struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+	i2c_detach_client(client);
+	kfree(state);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap)
+{
+	return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach);
+}
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+ 	.driver		= {
+		.owner		= THIS_MODULE,
+		.name		= "example",
+	},
+	.attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
+	.detach_client	= __devexit_p(example_detach),
+	.suspend	= example_suspend,
+	.resume		= example_resume,
+};
+
+
+Updating the client
+-------------------
+
+The new style binding model will check against a list of supported
+devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering
+the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and
+.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data,
+as follows:
+
+- static struct i2c_driver example_driver;
+
+- static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END };
+- static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END };
+
+- I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD;
+
+- static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap)
+- {
+- 	return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach);
+- }
+
+ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+-	.attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
+-	.detach_client	= __devexit_p(example_detach),
+ }
+
+Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so:
+
+ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
++	.probe		= example_probe,
++	.remove		= __devexit_p(example_remove),
+ }
+
+Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters
+which include the i2c_client that it will be working with:
+
+- static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind)
++ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
++			   const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+
+Change the name of example_attach to example_probe to align it with the
+i2c_driver entry names. The rest of the probe routine will now need to be
+changed as the i2c_client has already been setup for use.
+
+The necessary client fields have already been setup before
+the probe function is called, so the following client setup
+can be removed:
+
+-	example->client.addr    = addr;
+-	example->client.flags   = 0;
+-	example->client.adapter = adap;
+-
+-	strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE);
+
+The i2c_set_clientdata is now:
+
+-	i2c_set_clientdata(&state->client, state);
++	i2c_set_clientdata(client, state);
+
+The call to i2c_attach_client is no longer needed, if the probe
+routine exits successfully, then the driver will be automatically
+attached by the core. Change the probe routine as so:
+
+-	ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client);
+-	if (ret < 0) {
+-		dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n");
+-		kfree(state);
+-		return ret;
+-	}
+
+
+Remove the storage of 'struct i2c_client' from the 'struct example_state'
+as we are provided with the i2c_client in our example_probe. Instead we
+store a pointer to it for when it is needed.
+
+struct example_state {
+-	struct i2c_client	client;
++	struct i2c_client	*client;
+
+the new i2c client as so:
+
+-	struct device *dev = &adap->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
++ 	struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
+
+And remove the change after our client is attached, as the driver no
+longer needs to register a new client structure with the core:
+
+-	dev = &state->i2c_client.dev;
+
+In the probe routine, ensure that the new state has the client stored
+in it:
+
+static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *i2c_client,
+			 const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+{
+	struct example_state *state;
+ 	struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev;
+	int ret;
+
+	state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+	if (state == NULL) {
+		dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+		return -ENOMEM;
+	}
+
++	state->client = i2c_client;
+
+Update the detach method, by changing the name to _remove and
+to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you
+can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for
+any of the core functions.
+
+- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
++ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+	struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+-	i2c_detach_client(client);
+
+And finally ensure that we have the correct ID table for the i2c-core
+and other utilities:
+
++ struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = {
++       { "example", 0 },
++       { }
++};
++
++MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable);
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+ 	.driver		= {
+		.owner		= THIS_MODULE,
+		.name		= "example",
+	},
++	.id_table	= example_ids,
+
+
+Our driver should now look like this:
+
+struct example_state {
+	struct i2c_client	*client;
+	....
+};
+
+static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
+		     	 const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+{
+	struct example_state *state;
+	struct device *dev = &client->dev;
+
+	state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+	if (state == NULL) {
+		dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+		return -ENOMEM;
+	}
+
+	state->client = client;
+	i2c_set_clientdata(client, state);
+
+	/* rest of the initialisation goes here. */
+
+	dev_info(dev, "example client created\n");
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+	struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+	kfree(state);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = {
+	{ "example", 0 },
+	{ }
+};
+
+MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable);
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+ 	.driver		= {
+		.owner		= THIS_MODULE,
+		.name		= "example",
+	},
+	.id_table	= example_idtable,
+	.probe		= example_probe,
+	.remove		= __devexit_p(example_remove),
+	.suspend	= example_suspend,
+	.resume		= example_resume,
+};

Documentation/i2c/writing-clients

@@ -25,14 +25,29 @@ routines, and should be zero-initialized except for fields with data you
 provide.  A client structure holds device-specific information like the
 driver model device node, and its I2C address.
 
+/* iff driver uses driver model ("new style") binding model: */
+
+static struct i2c_device_id foo_idtable[] = {
+	{ "foo", my_id_for_foo },
+	{ "bar", my_id_for_bar },
+	{ }
+};
+
+MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, foo_idtable);
+
 static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = {
 	.driver = {
 		.name	= "foo",
 	},
 
 	/* iff driver uses driver model ("new style") binding model: */
+	.id_table	= foo_ids,
 	.probe		= foo_probe,
 	.remove		= foo_remove,
+	/* if device autodetection is needed: */
+	.class		= I2C_CLASS_SOMETHING,
+	.detect		= foo_detect,
+	.address_data	= &addr_data,
 
 	/* else, driver uses "legacy" binding model: */
 	.attach_adapter	= foo_attach_adapter,
@@ -173,10 +188,9 @@ handle may be used during foo_probe().  If foo_probe() reports success
 (zero not a negative status code) it may save the handle and use it until
 foo_remove() returns.  That binding model is used by most Linux drivers.
 
-Drivers match devices when i2c_client.driver_name and the driver name are
-the same; this approach is used in several other busses that don't have
-device typing support in the hardware.  The driver and module name should
-match, so hotplug/coldplug mechanisms will modprobe the driver.
+The probe function is called when an entry in the id_table name field
+matches the device's name. It is passed the entry that was matched so
+the driver knows which one in the table matched.
 
 
 Device Creation (Standard driver model)
@@ -207,6 +221,31 @@ in the I2C bus driver. You may want to save the returned i2c_client
 reference for later use.
 
 
+Device Detection (Standard driver model)
+----------------------------------------
+
+Sometimes you do not know in advance which I2C devices are connected to
+a given I2C bus.  This is for example the case of hardware monitoring
+devices on a PC's SMBus.  In that case, you may want to let your driver
+detect supported devices automatically.  This is how the legacy model
+was working, and is now available as an extension to the standard
+driver model (so that we can finally get rid of the legacy model.)
+
+You simply have to define a detect callback which will attempt to
+identify supported devices (returning 0 for supported ones and -ENODEV
+for unsupported ones), a list of addresses to probe, and a device type
+(or class) so that only I2C buses which may have that type of device
+connected (and not otherwise enumerated) will be probed.  The i2c
+core will then call you back as needed and will instantiate a device
+for you for every successful detection.
+
+Note that this mechanism is purely optional and not suitable for all
+devices.  You need some reliable way to identify the supported devices
+(typically using device-specific, dedicated identification registers),
+otherwise misdetections are likely to occur and things can get wrong
+quickly.
+
+
 Device Deletion (Standard driver model)
 ---------------------------------------
 
@@ -559,7 +598,6 @@ SMBus communication
   in terms of it. Never use this function directly!
 
 
-  extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte(struct i2c_client * client);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command);
@@ -568,30 +606,31 @@ SMBus communication
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client,
                                        u8 command, u16 value);
+  extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
+                                       u8 command, u8 *values);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
                                         u8 command, u8 length,
                                         u8 *values);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
                                            u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values);
-
-These ones were removed in Linux 2.6.10 because they had no users, but could
-be added back later if needed:
-
-  extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
-                                       u8 command, u8 *values);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client * client,
                                             u8 command, u8 length,
                                             u8 *values);
+
+These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could
+be added back later if needed:
+
+  extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client * client,
                                     u8 command, u16 value);
   extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
                                           u8 command, u8 length,
                                           u8 *values)
 
-All these transactions return -1 on failure. The 'write' transactions 
-return 0 on success; the 'read' transactions return the read value, except 
-for read_block, which returns the number of values read. The block buffers 
-need not be longer than 32 bytes.
+All these transactions return a negative errno value on failure. The 'write'
+transactions return 0 on success; the 'read' transactions return the read
+value, except for block transactions, which return the number of values
+read. The block buffers need not be longer than 32 bytes.
 
 You can read the file `smbus-protocol' for more information about the
 actual SMBus protocol.

Documentation/i386/boot.txt

@@ -1,887 +0,0 @@
-		     THE LINUX/I386 BOOT PROTOCOL
-		     ----------------------------
-
-		    H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com>
-			Last update 2007-05-23
-
-On the i386 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot
-convention.  This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as
-well as the desire in the early days to have the kernel itself be a
-bootable image, the complicated PC memory model and due to changed
-expectations in the PC industry caused by the effective demise of
-real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system.
-
-Currently, the following versions of the Linux/i386 boot protocol exist.
-
-Old kernels:	zImage/Image support only.  Some very early kernels
-		may not even support a command line.
-
-Protocol 2.00:	(Kernel 1.3.73) Added bzImage and initrd support, as
-		well as a formalized way to communicate between the
-		boot loader and the kernel.  setup.S made relocatable,
-		although the traditional setup area still assumed
-		writable.
-
-Protocol 2.01:	(Kernel 1.3.76) Added a heap overrun warning.
-
-Protocol 2.02:	(Kernel 2.4.0-test3-pre3) New command line protocol.
-		Lower the conventional memory ceiling.	No overwrite
-		of the traditional setup area, thus making booting
-		safe for systems which use the EBDA from SMM or 32-bit
-		BIOS entry points.  zImage deprecated but still
-		supported.
-
-Protocol 2.03:	(Kernel 2.4.18-pre1) Explicitly makes the highest possible
-		initrd address available to the bootloader.
-
-Protocol 2.04:	(Kernel 2.6.14) Extend the syssize field to four bytes.
-
-Protocol 2.05:	(Kernel 2.6.20) Make protected mode kernel relocatable.
-		Introduce relocatable_kernel and kernel_alignment fields.
-
-Protocol 2.06:	(Kernel 2.6.22) Added a field that contains the size of
-		the boot command line.
-
-Protocol 2.07:	(Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol.
-		Introduced hardware_subarch and hardware_subarch_data
-		and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags.
-
-Protocol 2.08:	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format
-		payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length
-		fields to aid in locating the payload.
-
-Protocol 2.09:	(Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
-		pointer to single linked list of struct	setup_data.
-
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT
-
-The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or
-zImage kernels, typically looks like:
-
-	|			 |
-0A0000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Do not use.  Reserved for BIOS EBDA.
-09A000	+------------------------+
-	|  Command line		 |
-	|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-098000	+------------------------+	
-	|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
-090200	+------------------------+
-	|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
-090000	+------------------------+
-	|  Protected-mode kernel |	The bulk of the kernel image.
-010000	+------------------------+
-	|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800	+------------------------+
-	|  Typically used by MBR |
-000600	+------------------------+ 
-	|  BIOS use only	 |
-000000	+------------------------+
-
-
-When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to
-0x100000 ("high memory"), and the kernel real-mode block (boot sector,
-setup, and stack/heap) was made relocatable to any address between
-0x10000 and end of low memory. Unfortunately, in protocols 2.00 and
-2.01 the 0x90000+ memory range is still used internally by the kernel;
-the 2.02 protocol resolves that problem.
-
-It is desirable to keep the "memory ceiling" -- the highest point in
-low memory touched by the boot loader -- as low as possible, since
-some newer BIOSes have begun to allocate some rather large amounts of
-memory, called the Extended BIOS Data Area, near the top of low
-memory.	 The boot loader should use the "INT 12h" BIOS call to verify
-how much low memory is available.
-
-Unfortunately, if INT 12h reports that the amount of memory is too
-low, there is usually nothing the boot loader can do but to report an
-error to the user.  The boot loader should therefore be designed to
-take up as little space in low memory as it reasonably can.  For
-zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the
-0x90000 segment, the boot loader should make sure not to use memory
-above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point.
-
-For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a
-memory layout like the following is suggested:
-
-	~                        ~
-        |  Protected-mode kernel |
-100000  +------------------------+
-	|  I/O memory hole	 |
-0A0000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for BIOS	 |	Leave as much as possible unused
-	~                        ~
-	|  Command line		 |	(Can also be below the X+10000 mark)
-X+10000	+------------------------+
-	|  Stack/heap		 |	For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-X+08000	+------------------------+	
-	|  Kernel setup		 |	The kernel real-mode code.
-	|  Kernel boot sector	 |	The kernel legacy boot sector.
-X       +------------------------+
-	|  Boot loader		 |	<- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000	+------------------------+
-	|  Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800	+------------------------+
-	|  Typically used by MBR |
-000600	+------------------------+ 
-	|  BIOS use only	 |
-000000	+------------------------+
-
-... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader
-permits.
-
-
-**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER
-
-In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a
-sector" refers to 512 bytes.  It is independent of the actual sector
-size of the underlying medium.
-
-The first step in loading a Linux kernel should be to load the
-real-mode code (boot sector and setup code) and then examine the
-following header at offset 0x01f1.  The real-mode code can total up to
-32K, although the boot loader may choose to load only the first two
-sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size.
-
-The header looks like:
-
-Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
-/Size
-
-01F1/1	ALL(1	setup_sects	The size of the setup in sectors
-01F2/2	ALL	root_flags	If set, the root is mounted readonly
-01F4/4	2.04+(2	syssize		The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras
-01F8/2	ALL	ram_size	DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-01FA/2	ALL	vid_mode	Video mode control
-01FC/2	ALL	root_dev	Default root device number
-01FE/2	ALL	boot_flag	0xAA55 magic number
-0200/2	2.00+	jump		Jump instruction
-0202/4	2.00+	header		Magic signature "HdrS"
-0206/2	2.00+	version		Boot protocol version supported
-0208/4	2.00+	realmode_swtch	Boot loader hook (see below)
-020C/2	2.00+	start_sys	The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete)
-020E/2	2.00+	kernel_version	Pointer to kernel version string
-0210/1	2.00+	type_of_loader	Boot loader identifier
-0211/1	2.00+	loadflags	Boot protocol option flags
-0212/2	2.00+	setup_move_size	Move to high memory size (used with hooks)
-0214/4	2.00+	code32_start	Boot loader hook (see below)
-0218/4	2.00+	ramdisk_image	initrd load address (set by boot loader)
-021C/4	2.00+	ramdisk_size	initrd size (set by boot loader)
-0220/4	2.00+	bootsect_kludge	DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-0224/2	2.01+	heap_end_ptr	Free memory after setup end
-0226/2	N/A	pad1		Unused
-0228/4	2.02+	cmd_line_ptr	32-bit pointer to the kernel command line
-022C/4	2.03+	initrd_addr_max	Highest legal initrd address
-0230/4	2.05+	kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel
-0234/1	2.05+	relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not
-0235/3	N/A	pad2		Unused
-0238/4	2.06+	cmdline_size	Maximum size of the kernel command line
-023C/4	2.07+	hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
-0240/8	2.07+	hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
-0248/4	2.08+	payload_offset	Offset of kernel payload
-024C/4	2.08+	payload_length	Length of kernel payload
-0250/8	2.09+	setup_data	64-bit physical pointer to linked list
-				of struct setup_data
-
-(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
-    real value is 4.
-
-(2) For boot protocol prior to 2.04, the upper two bytes of the syssize
-    field are unusable, which means the size of a bzImage kernel
-    cannot be determined.
-
-If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202,
-the boot protocol version is "old".  Loading an old kernel, the
-following parameters should be assumed:
-
-	Image type = zImage
-	initrd not supported
-	Real-mode kernel must be located at 0x90000.
-
-Otherwise, the "version" field contains the protocol version,
-e.g. protocol version 2.01 will contain 0x0201 in this field.  When
-setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields
-supported by the protocol version in use.
-
-
-**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS
-
-For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader
-("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader
-("write"), and some are expected to be read and modified by the
-bootloader ("modify").
-
-All general purpose boot loaders should write the fields marked
-(obligatory).  Boot loaders who want to load the kernel at a
-nonstandard address should fill in the fields marked (reloc); other
-boot loaders can ignore those fields.
-
-The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.)
-
-Field name:	setup_sects
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x1f1/1
-Protocol:	ALL
-
-  The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors.  If this field is
-  0, the real value is 4.  The real-mode code consists of the boot
-  sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code.
-
-Field name:	 root_flags
-Type:		 modify (optional)
-Offset/size:	 0x1f2/2
-Protocol:	 ALL
-
-  If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly.  The use of
-  this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the
-  command line instead.
-
-Field name:	syssize
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL)
-Protocol:	2.04+
-
-  The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs.
-  For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes
-  wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if
-  the LOAD_HIGH flag is set.
-
-Field name:	ram_size
-Type:		kernel internal
-Offset/size:	0x1f8/2
-Protocol:	ALL
-
-  This field is obsolete.
-
-Field name:	vid_mode
-Type:		modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x1fa/2
-
-  Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS.
-
-Field name:	root_dev
-Type:		modify (optional)
-Offset/size:	0x1fc/2
-Protocol:	ALL
-
-  The default root device device number.  The use of this field is
-  deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead.
-
-Field name:	boot_flag
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x1fe/2
-Protocol:	ALL
-
-  Contains 0xAA55.  This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have
-  to a magic number.
-
-Field name:	jump
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x200/2
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset
-  relative to byte 0x202.  This can be used to determine the size of
-  the header.
-
-Field name:	header
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x202/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448).
-
-Field name:	version
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x206/2
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format,
-  e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version
-  10.17.
-
-Field name:	readmode_swtch
-Type:		modify (optional)
-Offset/size:	0x208/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.)
-
-Field name:	start_sys
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x20c/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  The load low segment (0x1000).  Obsolete.
-
-Field name:	kernel_version
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x20e/2
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated
-  human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200.  This can
-  be used to display the kernel version to the user.  This value
-  should be less than (0x200*setup_sects).
-
-  For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version
-  number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file.
-  This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field
-  contains the value 15 or higher, as:
-
-	0x1c00  < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but
-	0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00)
-
-	0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15.
-
-Field name:	type_of_loader
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x210/1
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter
-  0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is
-  a version number.  Otherwise, enter 0xFF here.
-
-  Assigned boot loader ids:
-	0  LILO			(0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader)
-	1  Loadlin
-	2  bootsect-loader	(0x20, all other values reserved)
-	3  SYSLINUX
-	4  EtherBoot
-	5  ELILO
-	7  GRuB
-	8  U-BOOT
-	9  Xen
-	A  Gujin
-	B  Qemu
-
-  Please contact <hpa@zytor.com> if you need a bootloader ID
-  value assigned.
-
-Field name:	loadflags
-Type:		modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x211/1
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  This field is a bitmask.
-
-  Bit 0 (read):	LOADED_HIGH
-	- If 0, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x10000.
-	- If 1, the protected-mode code is loaded at 0x100000.
-
-  Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS
-	Protocol: 2.07+
-	- if 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
-	- if 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
-		Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with
-		a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment).
-
-  Bit 7 (write): CAN_USE_HEAP
-	Set this bit to 1 to indicate that the value entered in the
-	heap_end_ptr is valid.  If this field is clear, some setup code
-	functionality will be disabled.
-
-Field name:	setup_move_size
-Type:		modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x212/2
-Protocol:	2.00-2.01
-
-  When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not
-  loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading
-  sequence.  Fill in this field if you want additional data (such as
-  the kernel command line) moved in addition to the real-mode kernel
-  itself.
-
-  The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector.
-  
-  This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or
-  if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000.
-
-Field name:	code32_start
-Type:		modify (optional, reloc)
-Offset/size:	0x214/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  The address to jump to in protected mode.  This defaults to the load
-  address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to
-  determine the proper load address.
-
-  This field can be modified for two purposes:
-
-  1. as a boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.)
-
-  2. if a bootloader which does not install a hook loads a
-     relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify
-     this field to point to the load address.
-
-Field name:	ramdisk_image
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x218/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs.  Leave at
-  zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs.
-
-Field name:	ramdisk_size
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x21c/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs.  Leave at zero if there is no
-  initial ramdisk/ramfs.
-
-Field name:	bootsect_kludge
-Type:		kernel internal
-Offset/size:	0x220/4
-Protocol:	2.00+
-
-  This field is obsolete.
-
-Field name:	heap_end_ptr
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x224/2
-Protocol:	2.01+
-
-  Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode
-  code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200.
-
-Field name:	cmd_line_ptr
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x228/4
-Protocol:	2.02+
-
-  Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line.
-  The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of
-  the setup heap and 0xA0000; it does not have to be located in the
-  same 64K segment as the real-mode code itself.
-
-  Fill in this field even if your boot loader does not support a
-  command line, in which case you can point this to an empty string
-  (or better yet, to the string "auto".)  If this field is left at
-  zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support
-  the 2.02+ protocol.
-
-Field name:	initrd_addr_max
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x22c/4
-Protocol:	2.03+
-
-  The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial
-  ramdisk/ramfs contents.  For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this
-  field is not present, and the maximum address is 0x37FFFFFF.  (This
-  address is defined as the address of the highest safe byte, so if
-  your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is
-  0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.)
-
-Field name:	kernel_alignment
-Type:		read (reloc)
-Offset/size:	0x230/4
-Protocol:	2.05+
-
-  Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is true.)
-
-Field name:	relocatable_kernel
-Type:		read (reloc)
-Offset/size:	0x234/1
-Protocol:	2.05+
-
-  If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can
-  be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field.
-  After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to
-  point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook.
-
-Field name:	cmdline_size
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x238/4
-Protocol:	2.06+
-
-  The maximum size of the command line without the terminating
-  zero. This means that the command line can contain at most
-  cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the
-  maximum size was 255.
-
-Field name:	hardware_subarch
-Type:		write
-Offset/size:	0x23c/4
-Protocol:	2.07+
-
-  In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural
-  pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and
-  accessing process control registers needs to be done differently.
-
-  This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one
-  one of those environments.
-
-  0x00000000	The default x86/PC environment
-  0x00000001	lguest
-  0x00000002	Xen
-
-Field name:	hardware_subarch_data
-Type:		write
-Offset/size:	0x240/8
-Protocol:	2.07+
-
-  A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch
-
-Field name:	payload_offset
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x248/4
-Protocol:	2.08+
-
-  If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the
-  real-mode code to the payload.
-
-  The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and
-  uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic
-  numbers. Currently only gzip compressed ELF is used.
-  
-Field name:	payload_length
-Type:		read
-Offset/size:	0x24c/4
-Protocol:	2.08+
-
-  The length of the payload.
-
-**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
-
-From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over
-the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an
-initial remainder of 0xffffffff.  The checksum is appended to the
-file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the
-syssize field of the header is always 0.
-
-**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE
-
-The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot
-loader to communicate with the kernel.  Some of its options are also
-relevant to the boot loader itself, see "special command line options"
-below.
-
-The kernel command line is a null-terminated string. The maximum
-length can be retrieved from the field cmdline_size.  Before protocol
-version 2.06, the maximum was 255 characters.  A string that is too
-long will be automatically truncated by the kernel.
-
-If the boot protocol version is 2.02 or later, the address of the
-kernel command line is given by the header field cmd_line_ptr (see
-above.)  This address can be anywhere between the end of the setup
-heap and 0xA0000.
-
-If the protocol version is *not* 2.02 or higher, the kernel
-command line is entered using the following protocol:
-
-	At offset 0x0020 (word), "cmd_line_magic", enter the magic
-	number 0xA33F.
-
-	At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset
-	of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the
-	real-mode kernel).
-	
-	The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region
-	covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this
-	field.
-
-Field name:	setup_data
-Type:		write (obligatory)
-Offset/size:	0x250/8
-Protocol:	2.09+
-
-  The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of
-  struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot
-  parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is
-  as follow:
-
-  struct setup_data {
-	  u64 next;
-	  u32 type;
-	  u32 len;
-	  u8  data[0];
-  };
-
-  Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of
-  linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used
-  to identify the contents of data; the len is the length of data
-  field; the data holds the real payload.
-
-
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE
-
-The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as
-memory allocated for the kernel command line.  This needs to be done
-in the real-mode accessible memory in bottom megabyte.
-
-It should be noted that modern machines often have a sizable Extended
-BIOS Data Area (EBDA).  As a result, it is advisable to use as little
-of the low megabyte as possible.
-
-Unfortunately, under the following circumstances the 0x90000 memory
-segment has to be used:
-
-	- When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0).
-	- When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel.
-
-	  -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code
-	     can be loaded at another address, but it is internally
-	     relocated to 0x90000.  For the "old" protocol, the
-	     real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000.
-
-When loading at 0x90000, avoid using memory above 0x9a000.
-
-For boot protocol 2.02 or higher, the command line does not have to be
-located in the same 64K segment as the real-mode setup code; it is
-thus permitted to give the stack/heap the full 64K segment and locate
-the command line above it.
-
-The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode
-code, nor should it be located in high memory.
-
-
-**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION
-
-As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real
-mode segment:
-
-    When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment:
-
-	0x0000-0x7fff	Real mode kernel
-	0x8000-0xdfff	Stack and heap
-	0xe000-0xffff	Kernel command line
-
-    When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier:
-
-	0x0000-0x7fff	Real mode kernel
-	0x8000-0x97ff	Stack and heap
-	0x9800-0x9fff	Kernel command line
-
-Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
-
-	unsigned long base_ptr;	/* base address for real-mode segment */
-
-	if ( setup_sects == 0 ) {
-		setup_sects = 4;
-	}
-
-	if ( protocol >= 0x0200 ) {
-		type_of_loader = <type code>;
-		if ( loading_initrd ) {
-			ramdisk_image = <initrd_address>;
-			ramdisk_size = <initrd_size>;
-		}
-
-		if ( protocol >= 0x0202 && loadflags & 0x01 )
-			heap_end = 0xe000;
-		else
-			heap_end = 0x9800;
-
-		if ( protocol >= 0x0201 ) {
-			heap_end_ptr = heap_end - 0x200;
-			loadflags |= 0x80; /* CAN_USE_HEAP */
-		}
-
-		if ( protocol >= 0x0202 ) {
-			cmd_line_ptr = base_ptr + heap_end;
-			strcpy(cmd_line_ptr, cmdline);
-		} else {
-			cmd_line_magic	= 0xA33F;
-			cmd_line_offset = heap_end;
-			setup_move_size = heap_end + strlen(cmdline)+1;
-			strcpy(base_ptr+cmd_line_offset, cmdline);
-		}
-	} else {
-		/* Very old kernel */
-
-		heap_end = 0x9800;
-
-		cmd_line_magic	= 0xA33F;
-		cmd_line_offset = heap_end;
-
-		/* A very old kernel MUST have its real-mode code
-		   loaded at 0x90000 */
-
-		if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) {
-			/* Copy the real-mode kernel */
-			memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512);
-			base_ptr = 0x90000;		 /* Relocated */
-		}
-
-		strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline);
-
-		/* It is recommended to clear memory up to the 32K mark */
-		memset(0x90000 + (setup_sects+1)*512, 0,
-		       (64-(setup_sects+1))*512);
-	}
-
-
-**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL
-
-The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512
-in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.)
-It should be loaded at address 0x10000 for Image/zImage kernels and
-0x100000 for bzImage kernels.
-
-The kernel is a bzImage kernel if the protocol >= 2.00 and the 0x01
-bit (LOAD_HIGH) in the loadflags field is set:
-
-	is_bzImage = (protocol >= 0x0200) && (loadflags & 0x01);
-	load_address = is_bzImage ? 0x100000 : 0x10000;
-
-Note that Image/zImage kernels can be up to 512K in size, and thus use
-the entire 0x10000-0x90000 range of memory.  This means it is pretty
-much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at
-0x90000.  bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility.
-
-
-**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
-
-If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the
-user, the user may expect the following command line options to work.
-They should normally not be deleted from the kernel command line even
-though not all of them are actually meaningful to the kernel.  Boot
-loader authors who need additional command line options for the boot
-loader itself should get them registered in
-Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt to make sure they will not
-conflict with actual kernel options now or in the future.
-
-  vga=<mode>
-	<mode> here is either an integer (in C notation, either
-	decimal, octal, or hexadecimal) or one of the strings
-	"normal" (meaning 0xFFFF), "ext" (meaning 0xFFFE) or "ask"
-	(meaning 0xFFFD).  This value should be entered into the
-	vid_mode field, as it is used by the kernel before the command
-	line is parsed.
-
-  mem=<size>
-	<size> is an integer in C notation optionally followed by
-	(case insensitive) K, M, G, T, P or E (meaning << 10, << 20,
-	<< 30, << 40, << 50 or << 60).  This specifies the end of
-	memory to the kernel. This affects the possible placement of
-	an initrd, since an initrd should be placed near end of
-	memory.  Note that this is an option to *both* the kernel and
-	the bootloader!
-
-  initrd=<file>
-	An initrd should be loaded.  The meaning of <file> is
-	obviously bootloader-dependent, and some boot loaders
-	(e.g. LILO) do not have such a command.
-
-In addition, some boot loaders add the following options to the
-user-specified command line:
-
-  BOOT_IMAGE=<file>
-	The boot image which was loaded.  Again, the meaning of <file>
-	is obviously bootloader-dependent.
-
-  auto
-	The kernel was booted without explicit user intervention.
-
-If these options are added by the boot loader, it is highly
-recommended that they are located *first*, before the user-specified
-or configuration-specified command line.  Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh"
-gets confused by the "auto" option.
-
-
-**** RUNNING THE KERNEL
-
-The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is
-located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode
-kernel.  This means that if you loaded your real-mode kernel code at
-0x90000, the kernel entry point is 9020:0000.
-
-At entry, ds = es = ss should point to the start of the real-mode
-kernel code (0x9000 if the code is loaded at 0x90000), sp should be
-set up properly, normally pointing to the top of the heap, and
-interrupts should be disabled.  Furthermore, to guard against bugs in
-the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds =
-es = ss.
-
-In our example from above, we would do:
-
-	/* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must
-	   be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */
-
-	seg = base_ptr >> 4;
-
-	cli();	/* Enter with interrupts disabled! */
-
-	/* Set up the real-mode kernel stack */
-	_SS = seg;
-	_SP = heap_end;
-
-	_DS = _ES = _FS = _GS = seg;
-	jmp_far(seg+0x20, 0);	/* Run the kernel */
-
-If your boot sector accesses a floppy drive, it is recommended to
-switch off the floppy motor before running the kernel, since the
-kernel boot leaves interrupts off and thus the motor will not be
-switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as
-a demand-loaded module!
-
-
-**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS
-
-If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as
-LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the
-standard memory location requirements.  Such a boot loader may use the
-following hooks that, if set, are invoked by the kernel at the
-appropriate time.  The use of these hooks should probably be
-considered an absolutely last resort!
-
-IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and
-%edi across invocation.
-
-  realmode_swtch:
-	A 16-bit real mode far subroutine invoked immediately before
-	entering protected mode.  The default routine disables NMI, so
-	your routine should probably do so, too.
-
-  code32_start:
-	A 32-bit flat-mode routine *jumped* to immediately after the
-	transition to protected mode, but before the kernel is
-	uncompressed.  No segments, except CS, are guaranteed to be
-	set up (current kernels do, but older ones do not); you should
-	set them up to BOOT_DS (0x18) yourself.
-
-	After completing your hook, you should jump to the address
-	that was in this field before your boot loader overwrote it
-	(relocated, if appropriate.)
-
-
-**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
-
-For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI,
-LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel
-based on legacy BIOS can not be used, so a 32-bit boot protocol needs
-to be defined.
-
-In 32-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel
-should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params,
-traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params
-should be allocated and initialized to all zero. Then the setup header
-from offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be loaded into struct
-boot_params and examined. The end of setup header can be calculated as
-follow:
-
-	0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201
-
-In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct
-boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should
-also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that
-described in zero-page.txt.
-
-After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the
-32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol.
-
-In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the
-32-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded
-32/64-bit kernel.
-
-At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging
-disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors
-__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat
-segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS
-must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
-must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base
-address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero.

Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt

@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qe
 		/usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image
 		(xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4)
 
-5. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
+5. Known possible issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
 
-If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
+In the event of strange host crash issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
 
 (1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one.
 
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644
 	mov ar.pfs = loc1
 	mov rp = loc0
 	;;
--	srlz.d				// seralize restoration of psr.l
-+	srlz.i			// seralize restoration of psr.l
+-	srlz.d				// serialize restoration of psr.l
++	srlz.i			// serialize restoration of psr.l
 +	;;
 	br.ret.sptk.many b0
  END(ia64_pal_call_static)

Documentation/ia64/paravirt_ops.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+Paravirt_ops on IA64
+====================
+                          21 May 2008, Isaku Yamahata <yamahata@valinux.co.jp>
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+The aim of this documentation is to help with maintainability and/or to
+encourage people to use paravirt_ops/IA64.
+
+paravirt_ops (pv_ops in short) is a way for virtualization support of
+Linux kernel on x86. Several ways for virtualization support were
+proposed, paravirt_ops is the winner.
+On the other hand, now there are also several IA64 virtualization
+technologies like kvm/IA64, xen/IA64 and many other academic IA64
+hypervisors so that it is good to add generic virtualization
+infrastructure on Linux/IA64.
+
+
+What is paravirt_ops?
+---------------------
+It has been developed on x86 as virtualization support via API, not ABI.
+It allows each hypervisor to override operations which are important for
+hypervisors at API level. And it allows a single kernel binary to run on
+all supported execution environments including native machine.
+Essentially paravirt_ops is a set of function pointers which represent
+operations corresponding to low level sensitive instructions and high
+level functionalities in various area. But one significant difference
+from usual function pointer table is that it allows optimization with
+binary patch. It is because some of these operations are very
+performance sensitive and indirect call overhead is not negligible.
+With binary patch, indirect C function call can be transformed into
+direct C function call or in-place execution to eliminate the overhead.
+
+Thus, operations of paravirt_ops are classified into three categories.
+- simple indirect call
+  These operations correspond to high level functionality so that the
+  overhead of indirect call isn't very important.
+
+- indirect call which allows optimization with binary patch
+  Usually these operations correspond to low level instructions. They
+  are called frequently and performance critical. So the overhead is
+  very important.
+
+- a set of macros for hand written assembly code
+  Hand written assembly codes (.S files) also need paravirtualization
+  because they include sensitive instructions or some of code paths in
+  them are very performance critical.
+
+
+The relation to the IA64 machine vector
+---------------------------------------
+Linux/IA64 has the IA64 machine vector functionality which allows the
+kernel to switch implementations (e.g. initialization, ipi, dma api...)
+depending on executing platform.
+We can replace some implementations very easily defining a new machine
+vector. Thus another approach for virtualization support would be
+enhancing the machine vector functionality.
+But paravirt_ops approach was taken because
+- virtualization support needs wider support than machine vector does.
+  e.g. low level instruction paravirtualization. It must be
+       initialized very early before platform detection.
+
+- virtualization support needs more functionality like binary patch.
+  Probably the calling overhead might not be very large compared to the
+  emulation overhead of virtualization. However in the native case, the
+  overhead should be eliminated completely.
+  A single kernel binary should run on each environment including native,
+  and the overhead of paravirt_ops on native environment should be as
+  small as possible.
+
+- for full virtualization technology, e.g. KVM/IA64 or
+  Xen/IA64 HVM domain, the result would be
+  (the emulated platform machine vector. probably dig) + (pv_ops).
+  This means that the virtualization support layer should be under
+  the machine vector layer.
+
+Possibly it might be better to move some function pointers from
+paravirt_ops to machine vector. In fact, Xen domU case utilizes both
+pv_ops and machine vector.
+
+
+IA64 paravirt_ops
+-----------------
+In this section, the concrete paravirt_ops will be discussed.
+Because of the architecture difference between ia64 and x86, the
+resulting set of functions is very different from x86 pv_ops.
+
+- C function pointer tables
+They are not very performance critical so that simple C indirect
+function call is acceptable. The following structures are defined at
+this moment. For details see linux/include/asm-ia64/paravirt.h
+  - struct pv_info
+    This structure describes the execution environment.
+  - struct pv_init_ops
+    This structure describes the various initialization hooks.
+  - struct pv_iosapic_ops
+    This structure describes hooks to iosapic operations.
+  - struct pv_irq_ops
+    This structure describes hooks to irq related operations
+  - struct pv_time_op
+    This structure describes hooks to steal time accounting.
+
+- a set of indirect calls which need optimization
+Currently this class of functions correspond to a subset of IA64
+intrinsics. At this moment the optimization with binary patch isn't
+implemented yet.
+struct pv_cpu_op is defined. For details see
+linux/include/asm-ia64/paravirt_privop.h
+Mostly they correspond to ia64 intrinsics 1-to-1.
+Caveat: Now they are defined as C indirect function pointers, but in
+order to support binary patch optimization, they will be changed
+using GCC extended inline assembly code.
+
+- a set of macros for hand written assembly code (.S files)
+For maintenance purpose, the taken approach for .S files is single
+source code and compile multiple times with different macros definitions.
+Each pv_ops instance must define those macros to compile.
+The important thing here is that sensitive, but non-privileged
+instructions must be paravirtualized and that some privileged
+instructions also need paravirtualization for reasonable performance.
+Developers who modify .S files must be aware of that. At this moment
+an easy checker is implemented to detect paravirtualization breakage.
+But it doesn't cover all the cases.
+
+Sometimes this set of macros is called pv_cpu_asm_op. But there is no
+corresponding structure in the source code.
+Those macros mostly 1:1 correspond to a subset of privileged
+instructions. See linux/include/asm-ia64/native/inst.h.
+And some functions written in assembly also need to be overrided so
+that each pv_ops instance have to define some macros. Again see
+linux/include/asm-ia64/native/inst.h.
+
+
+Those structures must be initialized very early before start_kernel.
+Probably initialized in head.S using multi entry point or some other trick.
+For native case implementation see linux/arch/ia64/kernel/paravirt.c.

Documentation/input/cs461x.txt

@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The driver works with ALSA drivers simultaneously. For example, the xracer
 uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time.
 There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have
 comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized 
-separately of ALSA modules. So, you canm use only one joystick driver
+separately of ALSA modules. So, you can use only one joystick driver
 without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or
 run this driver.
 

Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt

@@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
-$Id: gameport-programming.txt,v 1.3 2001/04/24 13:51:37 vojtech Exp $
-
 Programming gameport drivers
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 

Documentation/input/input.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
 			  Linux Input drivers v1.0
 	       (c) 1999-2001 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
 			     Sponsored by SuSE
-	    $Id: input.txt,v 1.8 2002/05/29 03:15:01 bradleym Exp $
 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 0. Disclaimer

Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt

@@ -5,8 +5,6 @@
 
 			      7 Aug 1998
 
-	$Id: joystick-api.txt,v 1.2 2001/05/08 21:21:23 vojtech Exp $
-
 1. Initialization
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 

Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt

@@ -2,7 +2,6 @@
 	       (c) 1998-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
 	       (c) 1998 Andree Borrmann <a.borrmann@tu-bs.de>
 			     Sponsored by SuSE
-	$Id: joystick-parport.txt,v 1.6 2001/09/25 09:31:32 vojtech Exp $
 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 0. Disclaimer

Documentation/input/joystick.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
 		       Linux Joystick driver v2.0.0
 	       (c) 1996-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
 			     Sponsored by SuSE
-	   $Id: joystick.txt,v 1.12 2002/03/03 12:13:07 jdeneux Exp $
 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 0. Disclaimer

Documentation/ioctl-number.txt

@@ -117,6 +117,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 					<mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl>
 'c'	00-7F	linux/comstats.h	conflict!
 'c'	00-7F	linux/coda.h		conflict!
+'c'	80-9F	asm-s390/chsc.h
 'd'	00-FF	linux/char/drm/drm/h	conflict!
 'd'	00-DF	linux/video_decoder.h	conflict!
 'd'	F0-FF	linux/digi1.h

Documentation/ioctl/hdio.txt

@@ -508,12 +508,13 @@ HDIO_DRIVE_RESET		execute a device reset
 
 	error returns:
 	  EACCES	Access denied:  requires CAP_SYS_ADMIN
+	  ENXIO		No such device:	phy dead or ctl_addr == 0
+	  EIO		I/O error:	reset timed out or hardware error
 
 	notes:
 
-	  Abort any current command, prevent anything else from being
-	  queued, execute a reset on the device, and issue BLKRRPART
-	  ioctl on the block device.
+	  Execute a reset on the device as soon as the current IO
+	  operation has completed.
 
 	  Executes an ATAPI soft reset if applicable, otherwise
 	  executes an ATA soft reset on the controller.

Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 To decode a hex IOCTL code:
 
-Most architecures use this generic format, but check
+Most architectures use this generic format, but check
 include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc
 uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
 
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
  7-0	function #
 
 
- So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218,
+So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218,
 character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is:
 
 #define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH         _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2])

Documentation/iostats.txt

@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ disk and partition statistics are consistent again. Since we still don't
 keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to
 the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the
 eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead
-to some (probably insignificant) innacuracy.
+to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy.
 
 Additional notes
 ----------------

Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+mISDN is a new modular ISDN driver, in the long term it should replace
+the old I4L driver architecture for passiv ISDN cards.
+It was designed to allow a broad range of applications and interfaces
+but only have the basic function in kernel, the interface to the user
+space is based on sockets with a own address family AF_ISDN.
+

Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt

@@ -65,26 +65,26 @@ Install kexec-tools
 
 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL:
 
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz
+http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz
 
-This is a symlink to the latest version, which at the time of writing is
-20061214, the only release of kexec-tools-testing so far. As other versions
-are released, the older ones will remain available at
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/
+This is a symlink to the latest version.
 
-Note: Latest kexec-tools-testing git tree is available at
+The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at:
 
-git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git
+git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git
 or
-http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git;a=summary
+http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git
+
+More information about kexec-tools can be found at
+http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html
 
 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
 
-   tar xvpzf kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz
+   tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz
 
 4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows:
 
-   cd kexec-tools-testing-VERSION
+   cd kexec-tools-VERSION
 
 5) Configure the package, as follows:
 
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ There are two possible methods of using Kdump.
 2) Or use the system kernel binary itself as dump-capture kernel and there is
    no need to build a separate dump-capture kernel. This is possible
    only with the architecutres which support a relocatable kernel. As
-   of today i386 and ia64 architectures support relocatable kernel.
+   of today, i386, x86_64 and ia64 architectures support relocatable kernel.
 
 Building a relocatable kernel is advantageous from the point of view that
 one does not have to build a second kernel for capturing the dump. But

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -87,7 +87,8 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	SH	SuperH architecture is enabled.
 	SMP	The kernel is an SMP kernel.
 	SPARC	Sparc architecture is enabled.
-	SWSUSP	Software suspend is enabled.
+	SWSUSP	Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
+	SUSPEND	System suspend states are enabled.
 	TS	Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
 	USB	USB support is enabled.
 	USBHID	USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
@@ -147,10 +148,16 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			default: 0
 
 	acpi_sleep=	[HW,ACPI] Sleep options
-			Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep }
+			Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering }
 			See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode.
 			s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep
 			as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called.
+			s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being
+			used during resume from hibernation.
+			old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS
+			control method, wrt putting devices into low power
+			states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is
+			used by default).
 
 	acpi_sci=	[HW,ACPI] ACPI System Control Interrupt trigger mode
 			Format: { level | edge | high | low }
@@ -271,6 +278,17 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	aic79xx=	[HW,SCSI]
 			See Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt.
 
+	amd_iommu=	[HW,X86-84]
+			Pass parameters to the AMD IOMMU driver in the system.
+			Possible values are:
+			isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far
+			          as possible, will get its own protection
+			          domain)
+	amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64]
+			Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU
+			driver. Possible values are:
+			'32M', '64M' (default), '128M', '256M', '512M', '1G'
+
 	amijoy.map=	[HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support
 			Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT
 			Format: <a>,<b>
@@ -295,7 +313,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			when initialising the APIC and IO-APIC components.
 
 	apm=		[APM] Advanced Power Management
-			See header of arch/i386/kernel/apm.c.
+			See header of arch/x86/kernel/apm_32.c.
 
 	arcrimi=	[HW,NET] ARCnet - "RIM I" (entirely mem-mapped) cards
 			Format: <io>,<irq>,<nodeID>
@@ -560,6 +578,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	debug_objects	[KNL] Enable object debugging
 
+	debugpat	[X86] Enable PAT debugging
+
 	decnet.addr=	[HW,NET]
 			Format: <area>[,<node>]
 			See also Documentation/networking/decnet.txt.
@@ -599,6 +619,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			See drivers/char/README.epca and
 			Documentation/digiepca.txt.
 
+	disable_mtrr_cleanup [X86]
+	enable_mtrr_cleanup [X86]
+			The kernel tries to adjust MTRR layout from continuous
+			to discrete, to make X server driver able to add WB
+			entry later. This parameter enables/disables that.
+
+	mtrr_chunk_size=nn[KMG] [X86]
+			used for mtrr cleanup. It is largest continous chunk
+			that could hold holes aka. UC entries.
+
+	mtrr_gran_size=nn[KMG] [X86]
+			Used for mtrr cleanup. It is granularity of mtrr block.
+			Default is 1.
+			Large value could prevent small alignment from
+			using up MTRRs.
+
+	mtrr_spare_reg_nr=n [X86]
+			Format: <integer>
+			Range: 0,7 : spare reg number
+			Default : 1
+			Used for mtrr cleanup. It is spare mtrr entries number.
+			Set to 2 or more if your graphical card needs more.
+
 	disable_mtrr_trim [X86, Intel and AMD only]
 			By default the kernel will trim any uncacheable
 			memory out of your available memory pool based on
@@ -638,7 +681,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	elanfreq=	[X86-32]
 			See comment before function elanfreq_setup() in
-			arch/i386/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c.
+			arch/x86/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c.
 
 	elevator=	[IOSCHED]
 			Format: {"anticipatory" | "cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"}
@@ -722,9 +765,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	hd=		[EIDE] (E)IDE hard drive subsystem geometry
 			Format: <cyl>,<head>,<sect>
 
-	hd?=		[HW] (E)IDE subsystem
-	hd?lun=		See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
-
 	highmem=nn[KMG]	[KNL,BOOT] forces the highmem zone to have an exact
 			size of <nn>. This works even on boxes that have no
 			highmem otherwise. This also works to reduce highmem
@@ -737,8 +777,22 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	hisax=		[HW,ISDN]
 			See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax.
 
-	hugepages=	[HW,X86-32,IA-64] Maximal number of HugeTLB pages.
-	hugepagesz=	[HW,IA-64,PPC] The size of the HugeTLB pages.
+	hugepages=	[HW,X86-32,IA-64] HugeTLB pages to allocate at boot.
+	hugepagesz=	[HW,IA-64,PPC,X86-64] The size of the HugeTLB pages.
+			On x86-64 and powerpc, this option can be specified
+			multiple times interleaved with hugepages= to reserve
+			huge pages of different sizes. Valid pages sizes on
+			x86-64 are 2M (when the CPU supports "pse") and 1G
+			(when the CPU supports the "pdpe1gb" cpuinfo flag)
+			Note that 1GB pages can only be allocated at boot time
+			using hugepages= and not freed afterwards.
+	default_hugepagesz=
+			[same as hugepagesz=] The size of the default
+			HugeTLB page size. This is the size represented by
+			the legacy /proc/ hugepages APIs, used for SHM, and
+			default size when mounting hugetlbfs filesystems.
+			Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size
+			if not specified.
 
 	i8042.direct	[HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
 	i8042.dumbkbd	[HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
@@ -785,7 +839,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
 
 	idle=		[X86]
-			Format: idle=poll or idle=mwait
+			Format: idle=poll or idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
 			Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly improves the performance
 			of waking up a idle CPU, but will use a lot of power and make the system
 			run hot. Not recommended.
@@ -793,6 +847,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			to not use it because it doesn't save as much power as a normal idle
 			loop use the MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be the same
 			as idle=poll.
+			idle=halt. Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
+			In such case C2/C3 won't be used again.
+			idle=nomwait. Disable mwait for CPU C-states
 
 	ide-pci-generic.all-generic-ide [HW] (E)IDE subsystem
 			Claim all unknown PCI IDE storage controllers.
@@ -1166,7 +1223,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			         or
 			         memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
 
-	memtest=	[KNL,X86_64] Enable memtest
+	memtest=	[KNL,X86] Enable memtest
 			Format: <integer>
 			range: 0,4 : pattern number
 			default : 0 <disable>
@@ -1185,6 +1242,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	mga=		[HW,DRM]
 
+	mminit_loglevel=
+			[KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this
+			parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for
+			the additional memory initialisation checks. A value
+			of 0 disables mminit logging and a level of 4 will
+			log everything. Information is printed at KERN_DEBUG
+			so loglevel=8 may also need to be specified.
+
 	mousedev.tap_time=
 			[MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and
 			leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered
@@ -1208,6 +1273,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	mtdparts=	[MTD]
 			See drivers/mtd/cmdlinepart.c.
 
+	mtdset=		[ARM]
+			ARM/S3C2412 JIVE boot control
+
+			See arch/arm/mach-s3c2412/mach-jive.c
+
 	mtouchusb.raw_coordinates=
 			[HW] Make the MicroTouch USB driver use raw coordinates
 			('y', default) or cooked coordinates ('n')
@@ -1234,6 +1304,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			This usage is only documented in each driver source
 			file if at all.
 
+	nf_conntrack.acct=
+			[NETFILTER] Enable connection tracking flow accounting
+			0 to disable accounting
+			1 to enable accounting
+			Default value depends on CONFIG_NF_CT_ACCT that is
+			going to be removed in 2.6.29.
+
 	nfsaddrs=	[NFS]
 			See Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt.
 
@@ -1496,6 +1573,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 				Use with caution as certain devices share
 				address decoders between ROMs and other
 				resources.
+		norom		[X86-32,X86_64] Do not assign address space to
+				expansion ROMs that do not already have
+				BIOS assigned address ranges.
 		irqmask=0xMMMM	[X86-32] Set a bit mask of IRQs allowed to be
 				assigned automatically to PCI devices. You can
 				make the kernel exclude IRQs of your ISA cards
@@ -1571,6 +1651,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			Format: { parport<nr> | timid | 0 }
 			See also Documentation/parport.txt.
 
+	pmtmr=		[X86] Manual setup of pmtmr I/O Port. 
+			Override pmtimer IOPort with a hex value.
+			e.g. pmtmr=0x508
+
 	pnpacpi=	[ACPI]
 			{ off }
 
@@ -1679,6 +1763,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]]
 			See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c			
 
+	relax_domain_level=
+			[KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level.
+			See Documentation/cpusets.txt.
+
 	reserve=	[KNL,BUGS] Force the kernel to ignore some iomem area
 
 	reservetop=	[X86-32]
@@ -1971,6 +2059,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	snd-ymfpci=	[HW,ALSA]
 
+	softlockup_panic=
+			[KNL] Should the soft-lockup detector generate panics.
+
 	sonypi.*=	[HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver
 			See Documentation/sonypi.txt
 
@@ -2035,6 +2126,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	tdfx=		[HW,DRM]
 
+	test_suspend=	[SUSPEND]
+			Specify "mem" (for Suspend-to-RAM) or "standby" (for
+			standby suspend) as the system sleep state to briefly
+			enter during system startup.  The system is woken from
+			this state using a wakeup-capable RTC alarm.
+
 	thash_entries=	[KNL,NET]
 			Set number of hash buckets for TCP connection
 
@@ -2062,13 +2159,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			<deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency
 			0: no polling (default)
 
-	tipar.timeout=	[HW,PPT]
-			Set communications timeout in tenths of a second
-			(default 15).
-
-	tipar.delay=	[HW,PPT]
-			Set inter-bit delay in microseconds (default 10).
-
 	tmscsim=	[HW,SCSI]
 			See comment before function dc390_setup() in
 			drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c.
@@ -2102,6 +2192,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			Note that genuine overcurrent events won't be
 			reported either.
 
+	unknown_nmi_panic
+			[X86-32,X86-64]
+			Set unknown_nmi_panic=1 early on boot.
+
 	usbcore.autosuspend=
 			[USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used
 			for newly-detected USB devices (default 2).  This
@@ -2112,6 +2206,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 	usbhid.mousepoll=
 			[USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
 
+	add_efi_memmap	[EFI; x86-32,X86-64] Include EFI memory map in
+			kernel's map of available physical RAM.
+
 	vdso=		[X86-32,SH,x86-64]
 			vdso=2: enable compat VDSO (default with COMPAT_VDSO)
 			vdso=1: enable VDSO (default)

Documentation/keys.txt

@@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information.
     request_key_with_auxdata() respectively.
 
     These two functions return with the key potentially still under
-    construction.  To wait for contruction completion, the following should be
+    construction.  To wait for construction completion, the following should be
     called:
 
 	int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr);

Documentation/kprobes.txt

@@ -172,6 +172,7 @@ architectures:
 - ia64 (Does not support probes on instruction slot1.)
 - sparc64 (Return probes not yet implemented.)
 - arm
+- ppc
 
 3. Configuring Kprobes
 

Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt

@@ -174,8 +174,6 @@ The LED is exposed through the LED subsystem, and can be found in:
 The mail LED is autodetected, so if you don't have one, the LED device won't
 be registered.
 
-If you have a mail LED that is not green, please report this to me.
-
 Backlight
 *********
 

Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 		     ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
 
-                            Version 0.20
-                          April 09th, 2008
+                            Version 0.21
+                           May 29th, 2008
 
                Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
              Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -621,7 +621,8 @@ Bluetooth
 ---------
 
 procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
-sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable
+sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated)
+sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw"
 
 This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
 Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
@@ -643,8 +644,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
 		0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
 		1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
 
-	Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the
-	generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet.
+	Note: this interface has been superseded by the	generic rfkill
+	class.  It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
+	2010.
+
+	rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw": refer to
+	Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
 
 Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
 --------------------------------------------
@@ -1374,7 +1379,8 @@ EXPERIMENTAL: WAN
 -----------------
 
 procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
-sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable
+sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
+sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
 
 This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
 directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
@@ -1404,8 +1410,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
 		0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
 		1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
 
-	Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the
-	generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet.
+	Note: this interface has been superseded by the	generic rfkill
+	class.  It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
+	2010.
+
+	rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw": refer to
+	Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
 
 Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
 ------------------------------------

Documentation/leds-class.txt

@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs
 
 Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To
 support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the
-blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemeted, triggers can
+blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can
 attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set()
 function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL
 otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software.

Documentation/lguest/lguest.c

@@ -36,11 +36,13 @@
 #include <sched.h>
 #include <limits.h>
 #include <stddef.h>
+#include <signal.h>
 #include "linux/lguest_launcher.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_config.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_net.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_blk.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_console.h"
+#include "linux/virtio_rng.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_ring.h"
 #include "asm-x86/bootparam.h"
 /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do
@@ -64,8 +66,8 @@ typedef uint8_t u8;
 #endif
 /* We can have up to 256 pages for devices. */
 #define DEVICE_PAGES 256
-/* This will occupy 2 pages: it must be a power of 2. */
-#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 128
+/* This will occupy 3 pages: it must be a power of 2. */
+#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 256
 
 /*L:120 verbose is both a global flag and a macro.  The C preprocessor allows
  * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. */
@@ -74,12 +76,19 @@ static bool verbose;
 	do { if (verbose) printf(args); } while(0)
 /*:*/
 
-/* The pipe to send commands to the waker process */
-static int waker_fd;
+/* File descriptors for the Waker. */
+struct {
+	int pipe[2];
+	int lguest_fd;
+} waker_fds;
+
 /* The pointer to the start of guest memory. */
 static void *guest_base;
 /* The maximum guest physical address allowed, and maximum possible. */
 static unsigned long guest_limit, guest_max;
+/* The pipe for signal hander to write to. */
+static int timeoutpipe[2];
+static unsigned int timeout_usec = 500;
 
 /* a per-cpu variable indicating whose vcpu is currently running */
 static unsigned int __thread cpu_id;
@@ -155,11 +164,14 @@ struct virtqueue
 	/* Last available index we saw. */
 	u16 last_avail_idx;
 
-	/* The routine to call when the Guest pings us. */
-	void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me);
+	/* The routine to call when the Guest pings us, or timeout. */
+	void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me, bool timeout);
 
 	/* Outstanding buffers */
 	unsigned int inflight;
+
+	/* Is this blocked awaiting a timer? */
+	bool blocked;
 };
 
 /* Remember the arguments to the program so we can "reboot" */
@@ -190,6 +202,9 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align,
 	return iov->iov_base;
 }
 
+/* Wrapper for the last available index.  Makes it easier to change. */
+#define lg_last_avail(vq)	((vq)->last_avail_idx)
+
 /* The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian.  x86 is
  * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. */
 #define cpu_to_le16(v16) (v16)
@@ -199,6 +214,33 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align,
 #define le32_to_cpu(v32) (v32)
 #define le64_to_cpu(v64) (v64)
 
+/* Is this iovec empty? */
+static bool iov_empty(const struct iovec iov[], unsigned int num_iov)
+{
+	unsigned int i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++)
+		if (iov[i].iov_len)
+			return false;
+	return true;
+}
+
+/* Take len bytes from the front of this iovec. */
+static void iov_consume(struct iovec iov[], unsigned num_iov, unsigned len)
+{
+	unsigned int i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) {
+		unsigned int used;
+
+		used = iov[i].iov_len < len ? iov[i].iov_len : len;
+		iov[i].iov_base += used;
+		iov[i].iov_len -= used;
+		len -= used;
+	}
+	assert(len == 0);
+}
+
 /* The device virtqueue descriptors are followed by feature bitmasks. */
 static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev)
 {
@@ -254,6 +296,7 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num)
 		    PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0);
 	if (addr == MAP_FAILED)
 		err(1, "Mmaping %u pages of /dev/zero", num);
+	close(fd);
 
 	return addr;
 }
@@ -540,69 +583,64 @@ static void add_device_fd(int fd)
  * watch, but handing a file descriptor mask through to the kernel is fairly
  * icky.
  *
- * Instead, we fork off a process which watches the file descriptors and writes
+ * Instead, we clone off a thread which watches the file descriptors and writes
  * the LHREQ_BREAK command to the /dev/lguest file descriptor to tell the Host
  * stop running the Guest.  This causes the Launcher to return from the
  * /dev/lguest read with -EAGAIN, where it will write to /dev/lguest to reset
  * the LHREQ_BREAK and wake us up again.
  *
  * This, of course, is merely a different *kind* of icky.
+ *
+ * Given my well-known antipathy to threads, I'd prefer to use processes.  But
+ * it's easier to share Guest memory with threads, and trivial to share the
+ * devices.infds as the Launcher changes it.
  */
-static void wake_parent(int pipefd, int lguest_fd)
+static int waker(void *unused)
 {
-	/* Add the pipe from the Launcher to the fdset in the device_list, so
-	 * we watch it, too. */
-	add_device_fd(pipefd);
+	/* Close the write end of the pipe: only the Launcher has it open. */
+	close(waker_fds.pipe[1]);
 
 	for (;;) {
 		fd_set rfds = devices.infds;
 		unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 1 };
+		unsigned int maxfd = devices.max_infd;
+
+		/* We also listen to the pipe from the Launcher. */
+		FD_SET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds);
+		if (waker_fds.pipe[0] > maxfd)
+			maxfd = waker_fds.pipe[0];
 
 		/* Wait until input is ready from one of the devices. */
-		select(devices.max_infd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL);
-		/* Is it a message from the Launcher? */
-		if (FD_ISSET(pipefd, &rfds)) {
-			int fd;
-			/* If read() returns 0, it means the Launcher has
-			 * exited.  We silently follow. */
-			if (read(pipefd, &fd, sizeof(fd)) == 0)
-				exit(0);
-			/* Otherwise it's telling us to change what file
-			 * descriptors we're to listen to.  Positive means
-			 * listen to a new one, negative means stop
-			 * listening. */
-			if (fd >= 0)
-				FD_SET(fd, &devices.infds);
-			else
-				FD_CLR(-fd - 1, &devices.infds);
-		} else /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command. */
-			pwrite(lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id);
+		select(maxfd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+
+		/* Message from Launcher? */
+		if (FD_ISSET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds)) {
+			char c;
+			/* If this fails, then assume Launcher has exited.
+			 * Don't do anything on exit: we're just a thread! */
+			if (read(waker_fds.pipe[0], &c, 1) != 1)
+				_exit(0);
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Send LHREQ_BREAK command to snap the Launcher out of it. */
+		pwrite(waker_fds.lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id);
 	}
+	return 0;
 }
 
 /* This routine just sets up a pipe to the Waker process. */
-static int setup_waker(int lguest_fd)
-{
-	int pipefd[2], child;
-
-	/* We create a pipe to talk to the Waker, and also so it knows when the
-	 * Launcher dies (and closes pipe). */
-	pipe(pipefd);
-	child = fork();
-	if (child == -1)
-		err(1, "forking");
-
-	if (child == 0) {
-		/* We are the Waker: close the "writing" end of our copy of the
-		 * pipe and start waiting for input. */
-		close(pipefd[1]);
-		wake_parent(pipefd[0], lguest_fd);
-	}
-	/* Close the reading end of our copy of the pipe. */
-	close(pipefd[0]);
+static void setup_waker(int lguest_fd)
+{
+	/* This pipe is closed when Launcher dies, telling Waker. */
+	if (pipe(waker_fds.pipe) != 0)
+		err(1, "Creating pipe for Waker");
 
-	/* Here is the fd used to talk to the waker. */
-	return pipefd[1];
+	/* Waker also needs to know the lguest fd */
+	waker_fds.lguest_fd = lguest_fd;
+
+	if (clone(waker, malloc(4096) + 4096, CLONE_VM | SIGCHLD, NULL) == -1)
+		err(1, "Creating Waker");
 }
 
 /*
@@ -661,19 +699,22 @@ static unsigned get_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq,
 			    unsigned int *out_num, unsigned int *in_num)
 {
 	unsigned int i, head;
+	u16 last_avail;
 
 	/* Check it isn't doing very strange things with descriptor numbers. */
-	if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - vq->last_avail_idx) > vq->vring.num)
+	last_avail = lg_last_avail(vq);
+	if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - last_avail) > vq->vring.num)
 		errx(1, "Guest moved used index from %u to %u",
-		     vq->last_avail_idx, vq->vring.avail->idx);
+		     last_avail, vq->vring.avail->idx);
 
 	/* If there's nothing new since last we looked, return invalid. */
-	if (vq->vring.avail->idx == vq->last_avail_idx)
+	if (vq->vring.avail->idx == last_avail)
 		return vq->vring.num;
 
 	/* Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment
 	 * the index we've seen. */
-	head = vq->vring.avail->ring[vq->last_avail_idx++ % vq->vring.num];
+	head = vq->vring.avail->ring[last_avail % vq->vring.num];
+	lg_last_avail(vq)++;
 
 	/* If their number is silly, that's a fatal mistake. */
 	if (head >= vq->vring.num)
@@ -821,8 +862,8 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 				unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 0 };
 				/* Close the fd so Waker will know it has to
 				 * exit. */
-				close(waker_fd);
-				/* Just in case waker is blocked in BREAK, send
+				close(waker_fds.pipe[1]);
+				/* Just in case Waker is blocked in BREAK, send
 				 * unbreak now. */
 				write(fd, args, sizeof(args));
 				exit(2);
@@ -839,7 +880,7 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 
 /* Handling output for console is simple: we just get all the output buffers
  * and write them to stdout. */
-static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
 	unsigned int head, out, in;
 	int len;
@@ -854,6 +895,21 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
 	}
 }
 
+static void block_vq(struct virtqueue *vq)
+{
+	struct itimerval itm;
+
+	vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+	vq->blocked = true;
+
+	itm.it_interval.tv_sec = 0;
+	itm.it_interval.tv_usec = 0;
+	itm.it_value.tv_sec = 0;
+	itm.it_value.tv_usec = timeout_usec;
+
+	setitimer(ITIMER_REAL, &itm, NULL);
+}
+
 /*
  * The Network
  *
@@ -861,22 +917,34 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
  * and write them (ignoring the first element) to this device's file descriptor
  * (/dev/net/tun).
  */
-static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
-	unsigned int head, out, in;
+	unsigned int head, out, in, num = 0;
 	int len;
 	struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num];
+	static int last_timeout_num;
 
 	/* Keep getting output buffers from the Guest until we run out. */
 	while ((head = get_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in)) != vq->vring.num) {
 		if (in)
 			errx(1, "Input buffers in output queue?");
-		/* Check header, but otherwise ignore it (we told the Guest we
-		 * supported no features, so it shouldn't have anything
-		 * interesting). */
-		(void)convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr);
-		len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov+1, out-1);
+		len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov, out);
+		if (len < 0)
+			err(1, "Writing network packet to tun");
 		add_used_and_trigger(fd, vq, head, len);
+		num++;
+	}
+
+	/* Block further kicks and set up a timer if we saw anything. */
+	if (!timeout && num)
+		block_vq(vq);
+
+	if (timeout) {
+		if (num < last_timeout_num)
+			timeout_usec += 10;
+		else if (timeout_usec > 1)
+			timeout_usec--;
+		last_timeout_num = num;
 	}
 }
 
@@ -887,7 +955,6 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 	unsigned int head, in_num, out_num;
 	int len;
 	struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num];
-	struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr;
 
 	/* First we need a network buffer from the Guests's recv virtqueue. */
 	head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num);
@@ -896,25 +963,23 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 		 * early, the Guest won't be ready yet.  Wait until the device
 		 * status says it's ready. */
 		/* FIXME: Actually want DRIVER_ACTIVE here. */
-		if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)
-			warn("network: no dma buffer!");
+
+		/* Now tell it we want to know if new things appear. */
+		dev->vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+		wmb();
+
 		/* We'll turn this back on if input buffers are registered. */
 		return false;
 	} else if (out_num)
 		errx(1, "Output buffers in network recv queue?");
 
-	/* First element is the header: we set it to 0 (no features). */
-	hdr = convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr);
-	hdr->flags = 0;
-	hdr->gso_type = VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE;
-
 	/* Read the packet from the device directly into the Guest's buffer. */
-	len = readv(dev->fd, iov+1, in_num-1);
+	len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num);
 	if (len <= 0)
 		err(1, "reading network");
 
 	/* Tell the Guest about the new packet. */
-	add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, sizeof(*hdr) + len);
+	add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, len);
 
 	verbose("tun input packet len %i [%02x %02x] (%s)\n", len,
 		((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[0], ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[1],
@@ -927,11 +992,18 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 /*L:215 This is the callback attached to the network and console input
  * virtqueues: it ensures we try again, in case we stopped console or net
  * delivery because Guest didn't have any buffers. */
-static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
 	add_device_fd(vq->dev->fd);
-	/* Tell waker to listen to it again */
-	write(waker_fd, &vq->dev->fd, sizeof(vq->dev->fd));
+	/* Snap the Waker out of its select loop. */
+	write(waker_fds.pipe[1], "", 1);
+}
+
+static void net_enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
+{
+	/* We don't need to know again when Guest refills receive buffer. */
+	vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+	enable_fd(fd, vq, timeout);
 }
 
 /* When the Guest tells us they updated the status field, we handle it. */
@@ -951,7 +1023,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev)
 		for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) {
 			memset(vq->vring.desc, 0,
 			       vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize()));
-			vq->last_avail_idx = 0;
+			lg_last_avail(vq) = 0;
 		}
 	} else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) {
 		warnx("Device %s configuration FAILED", dev->name);
@@ -960,10 +1032,10 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev)
 
 		verbose("Device %s OK: offered", dev->name);
 		for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++)
-			verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]);
+			verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]);
 		verbose(", accepted");
 		for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++)
-			verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)
+			verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)
 				[dev->desc->feature_len+i]);
 
 		if (dev->ready)
@@ -1000,7 +1072,7 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr)
 			if (strcmp(vq->dev->name, "console") != 0)
 				verbose("Output to %s\n", vq->dev->name);
 			if (vq->handle_output)
-				vq->handle_output(fd, vq);
+				vq->handle_output(fd, vq, false);
 			return;
 		}
 	}
@@ -1014,6 +1086,29 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr)
 	      strnlen(from_guest_phys(addr), guest_limit - addr));
 }
 
+static void handle_timeout(int fd)
+{
+	char buf[32];
+	struct device *i;
+	struct virtqueue *vq;
+
+	/* Clear the pipe */
+	read(timeoutpipe[0], buf, sizeof(buf));
+
+	/* Check each device and virtqueue: flush blocked ones. */
+	for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) {
+		for (vq = i->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) {
+			if (!vq->blocked)
+				continue;
+
+			vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+			vq->blocked = false;
+			if (vq->handle_output)
+				vq->handle_output(fd, vq, true);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
 /* This is called when the Waker wakes us up: check for incoming file
  * descriptors. */
 static void handle_input(int fd)
@@ -1024,16 +1119,20 @@ static void handle_input(int fd)
 	for (;;) {
 		struct device *i;
 		fd_set fds = devices.infds;
+		int num;
 
+		num = select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll);
+		/* Could get interrupted */
+		if (num < 0)
+			continue;
 		/* If nothing is ready, we're done. */
-		if (select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll) == 0)
+		if (num == 0)
 			break;
 
 		/* Otherwise, call the device(s) which have readable file
 		 * descriptors and a method of handling them.  */
 		for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) {
 			if (i->handle_input && FD_ISSET(i->fd, &fds)) {
-				int dev_fd;
 				if (i->handle_input(fd, i))
 					continue;
 
@@ -1043,13 +1142,12 @@ static void handle_input(int fd)
 				 * buffers to deliver into.  Console also uses
 				 * it when it discovers that stdin is closed. */
 				FD_CLR(i->fd, &devices.infds);
-				/* Tell waker to ignore it too, by sending a
-				 * negative fd number (-1, since 0 is a valid
-				 * FD number). */
-				dev_fd = -i->fd - 1;
-				write(waker_fd, &dev_fd, sizeof(dev_fd));
 			}
 		}
+
+		/* Is this the timeout fd? */
+		if (FD_ISSET(timeoutpipe[0], &fds))
+			handle_timeout(fd);
 	}
 }
 
@@ -1098,7 +1196,7 @@ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type)
 /* Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues.  We
  * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. */
 static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
-			  void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me))
+			  void (*handle_output)(int, struct virtqueue *, bool))
 {
 	unsigned int pages;
 	struct virtqueue **i, *vq = malloc(sizeof(*vq));
@@ -1114,6 +1212,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
 	vq->last_avail_idx = 0;
 	vq->dev = dev;
 	vq->inflight = 0;
+	vq->blocked = false;
 
 	/* Initialize the configuration. */
 	vq->config.num = num_descs;
@@ -1246,6 +1345,24 @@ static void setup_console(void)
 }
 /*:*/
 
+static void timeout_alarm(int sig)
+{
+	write(timeoutpipe[1], "", 1);
+}
+
+static void setup_timeout(void)
+{
+	if (pipe(timeoutpipe) != 0)
+		err(1, "Creating timeout pipe");
+
+	if (fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_SETFL,
+		  fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_GETFL) | O_NONBLOCK) != 0)
+		err(1, "Making timeout pipe nonblocking");
+
+	add_device_fd(timeoutpipe[0]);
+	signal(SIGALRM, timeout_alarm);
+}
+
 /*M:010 Inter-guest networking is an interesting area.  Simplest is to have a
  * --sharenet=<name> option which opens or creates a named pipe.  This can be
  * used to send packets to another guest in a 1:1 manner.
@@ -1264,10 +1381,25 @@ static void setup_console(void)
 
 static u32 str2ip(const char *ipaddr)
 {
-	unsigned int byte[4];
+	unsigned int b[4];
 
-	sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &byte[0], &byte[1], &byte[2], &byte[3]);
-	return (byte[0] << 24) | (byte[1] << 16) | (byte[2] << 8) | byte[3];
+	if (sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &b[0], &b[1], &b[2], &b[3]) != 4)
+		errx(1, "Failed to parse IP address '%s'", ipaddr);
+	return (b[0] << 24) | (b[1] << 16) | (b[2] << 8) | b[3];
+}
+
+static void str2mac(const char *macaddr, unsigned char mac[6])
+{
+	unsigned int m[6];
+	if (sscanf(macaddr, "%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x",
+		   &m[0], &m[1], &m[2], &m[3], &m[4], &m[5]) != 6)
+		errx(1, "Failed to parse mac address '%s'", macaddr);
+	mac[0] = m[0];
+	mac[1] = m[1];
+	mac[2] = m[2];
+	mac[3] = m[3];
+	mac[4] = m[4];
+	mac[5] = m[5];
 }
 
 /* This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the
@@ -1288,6 +1420,7 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name)
 		errx(1, "interface %s does not exist!", if_name);
 
 	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, br_name, IFNAMSIZ);
+	ifr.ifr_name[IFNAMSIZ-1] = '\0';
 	ifr.ifr_ifindex = ifidx;
 	if (ioctl(fd, SIOCBRADDIF, &ifr) < 0)
 		err(1, "can't add %s to bridge %s", if_name, br_name);
@@ -1296,64 +1429,90 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name)
 /* This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings
  * it up so packets will flow, the copies the MAC address into the hwaddr
  * pointer. */
-static void configure_device(int fd, const char *devname, u32 ipaddr,
-			     unsigned char hwaddr[6])
+static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr)
 {
 	struct ifreq ifr;
 	struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)&ifr.ifr_addr;
 
-	/* Don't read these incantations.  Just cut & paste them like I did! */
 	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, devname);
+	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif);
+
+	/* Don't read these incantations.  Just cut & paste them like I did! */
 	sin->sin_family = AF_INET;
 	sin->sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr);
 	if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr) != 0)
-		err(1, "Setting %s interface address", devname);
+		err(1, "Setting %s interface address", tapif);
 	ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_UP;
 	if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr) != 0)
-		err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", devname);
+		err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", tapif);
+}
+
+static void get_mac(int fd, const char *tapif, unsigned char hwaddr[6])
+{
+	struct ifreq ifr;
+
+	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
+	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif);
 
 	/* SIOC stands for Socket I/O Control.  G means Get (vs S for Set
 	 * above).  IF means Interface, and HWADDR is hardware address.
 	 * Simple! */
 	if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) != 0)
-		err(1, "getting hw address for %s", devname);
+		err(1, "getting hw address for %s", tapif);
 	memcpy(hwaddr, ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data, 6);
 }
 
-/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network.  This can either use bridging or
- * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject
- * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card.  We
- * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */
-static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg)
+static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ])
 {
-	struct device *dev;
 	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int netfd, ipfd;
-	u32 ip;
-	const char *br_name = NULL;
-	struct virtio_net_config conf;
+	int netfd;
+
+	/* Start with this zeroed.  Messy but sure. */
+	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
 
 	/* We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device.  A
 	 * tap device is like a tun device, only somehow different.  To tell
 	 * the truth, I completely blundered my way through this code, but it
 	 * works now! */
 	netfd = open_or_die("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR);
-	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-	ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI;
+	ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR;
 	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "tap%d");
 	if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETIFF, &ifr) != 0)
 		err(1, "configuring /dev/net/tun");
+
+	if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETOFFLOAD,
+		  TUN_F_CSUM|TUN_F_TSO4|TUN_F_TSO6|TUN_F_TSO_ECN) != 0)
+		err(1, "Could not set features for tun device");
+
 	/* We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this
 	 * device: trust us! */
 	ioctl(netfd, TUNSETNOCSUM, 1);
 
+	memcpy(tapif, ifr.ifr_name, IFNAMSIZ);
+	return netfd;
+}
+
+/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network.  This can either use bridging or
+ * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject
+ * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card.  We
+ * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */
+static void setup_tun_net(char *arg)
+{
+	struct device *dev;
+	int netfd, ipfd;
+	u32 ip = INADDR_ANY;
+	bool bridging = false;
+	char tapif[IFNAMSIZ], *p;
+	struct virtio_net_config conf;
+
+	netfd = get_tun_device(tapif);
+
 	/* First we create a new network device. */
 	dev = new_device("net", VIRTIO_ID_NET, netfd, handle_tun_input);
 
 	/* Network devices need a receive and a send queue, just like
 	 * console. */
-	add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd);
+	add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_enable_fd);
 	add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, handle_net_output);
 
 	/* We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the
@@ -1364,28 +1523,56 @@ static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg)
 
 	/* If the command line was --tunnet=bridge:<name> do bridging. */
 	if (!strncmp(BRIDGE_PFX, arg, strlen(BRIDGE_PFX))) {
-		ip = INADDR_ANY;
-		br_name = arg + strlen(BRIDGE_PFX);
-		add_to_bridge(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, br_name);
-	} else /* It is an IP address to set up the device with */
+		arg += strlen(BRIDGE_PFX);
+		bridging = true;
+	}
+
+	/* A mac address may follow the bridge name or IP address */
+	p = strchr(arg, ':');
+	if (p) {
+		str2mac(p+1, conf.mac);
+		*p = '\0';
+	} else {
+		p = arg + strlen(arg);
+		/* None supplied; query the randomly assigned mac. */
+		get_mac(ipfd, tapif, conf.mac);
+	}
+
+	/* arg is now either an IP address or a bridge name */
+	if (bridging)
+		add_to_bridge(ipfd, tapif, arg);
+	else
 		ip = str2ip(arg);
 
-	/* Set up the tun device, and get the mac address for the interface. */
-	configure_device(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, ip, conf.mac);
+	/* Set up the tun device. */
+	configure_device(ipfd, tapif, ip);
 
 	/* Tell Guest what MAC address to use. */
 	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
 	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY);
+	/* Expect Guest to handle everything except UFO */
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6);
+	add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN);
 	set_config(dev, sizeof(conf), &conf);
 
 	/* We don't need the socket any more; setup is done. */
 	close(ipfd);
 
-	verbose("device %u: tun net %u.%u.%u.%u\n",
-		devices.device_num++,
-		(u8)(ip>>24),(u8)(ip>>16),(u8)(ip>>8),(u8)ip);
-	if (br_name)
-		verbose("attached to bridge: %s\n", br_name);
+	devices.device_num++;
+
+	if (bridging)
+		verbose("device %u: tun %s attached to bridge: %s\n",
+			devices.device_num, tapif, arg);
+	else
+		verbose("device %u: tun %s: %s\n",
+			devices.device_num, tapif, arg);
 }
 
 /* Our block (disk) device should be really simple: the Guest asks for a block
@@ -1550,7 +1737,7 @@ static bool handle_io_finish(int fd, struct device *dev)
 }
 
 /* When the Guest submits some I/O, we just need to wake the I/O thread. */
-static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
 	struct vblk_info *vblk = vq->dev->priv;
 	char c = 0;
@@ -1621,6 +1808,64 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename)
 	verbose("device %u: virtblock %llu sectors\n",
 		devices.device_num, le64_to_cpu(conf.capacity));
 }
+
+/* Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's
+ * input buffers.  The usual case is that the Guest doesn't want random numbers
+ * and so has no buffers although /dev/random is still readable, whereas
+ * console is the reverse.
+ *
+ * The same logic applies, however. */
+static bool handle_rng_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
+{
+	int len;
+	unsigned int head, in_num, out_num, totlen = 0;
+	struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num];
+
+	/* First we need a buffer from the Guests's virtqueue. */
+	head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num);
+
+	/* If they're not ready for input, stop listening to this file
+	 * descriptor.  We'll start again once they add an input buffer. */
+	if (head == dev->vq->vring.num)
+		return false;
+
+	if (out_num)
+		errx(1, "Output buffers in rng?");
+
+	/* This is why we convert to iovecs: the readv() call uses them, and so
+	 * it reads straight into the Guest's buffer.  We loop to make sure we
+	 * fill it. */
+	while (!iov_empty(iov, in_num)) {
+		len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num);
+		if (len <= 0)
+			err(1, "Read from /dev/random gave %i", len);
+		iov_consume(iov, in_num, len);
+		totlen += len;
+	}
+
+	/* Tell the Guest about the new input. */
+	add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, totlen);
+
+	/* Everything went OK! */
+	return true;
+}
+
+/* And this creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. */
+static void setup_rng(void)
+{
+	struct device *dev;
+	int fd;
+
+	fd = open_or_die("/dev/random", O_RDONLY);
+
+	/* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */
+	dev = new_device("rng", VIRTIO_ID_RNG, fd, handle_rng_input);
+
+	/* The device has one virtqueue, where the Guest places inbufs. */
+	add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd);
+
+	verbose("device %u: rng\n", devices.device_num++);
+}
 /* That's the end of device setup. */
 
 /*L:230 Reboot is pretty easy: clean up and exec() the Launcher afresh. */
@@ -1628,11 +1873,12 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void)
 {
 	unsigned int i;
 
-	/* Closing pipes causes the Waker thread and io_threads to die, and
-	 * closing /dev/lguest cleans up the Guest.  Since we don't track all
-	 * open fds, we simply close everything beyond stderr. */
+	/* Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond
+	 * stderr. */
 	for (i = 3; i < FD_SETSIZE; i++)
 		close(i);
+
+	/* The exec automatically gets rid of the I/O and Waker threads. */
 	execv(main_args[0], main_args);
 	err(1, "Could not exec %s", main_args[0]);
 }
@@ -1663,7 +1909,7 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(int lguest_fd)
 		/* ERESTART means that we need to reboot the guest */
 		} else if (errno == ERESTART) {
 			restart_guest();
-		/* EAGAIN means the Waker wanted us to look at some input.
+		/* EAGAIN means a signal (timeout).
 		 * Anything else means a bug or incompatible change. */
 		} else if (errno != EAGAIN)
 			err(1, "Running guest failed");
@@ -1691,13 +1937,14 @@ static struct option opts[] = {
 	{ "verbose", 0, NULL, 'v' },
 	{ "tunnet", 1, NULL, 't' },
 	{ "block", 1, NULL, 'b' },
+	{ "rng", 0, NULL, 'r' },
 	{ "initrd", 1, NULL, 'i' },
 	{ NULL },
 };
 static void usage(void)
 {
 	errx(1, "Usage: lguest [--verbose] "
-	     "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>)\n"
+	     "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>:<macaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>:<macaddr>)\n"
 	     "|--block=<filename>|--initrd=<filename>]...\n"
 	     "<mem-in-mb> vmlinux [args...]");
 }
@@ -1765,6 +2012,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 		case 'b':
 			setup_block_file(optarg);
 			break;
+		case 'r':
+			setup_rng();
+			break;
 		case 'i':
 			initrd_name = optarg;
 			break;
@@ -1783,6 +2033,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 	/* We always have a console device */
 	setup_console();
 
+	/* We can timeout waiting for Guest network transmit. */
+	setup_timeout();
+
 	/* Now we load the kernel */
 	start = load_kernel(open_or_die(argv[optind+1], O_RDONLY));
 
@@ -1826,10 +2079,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 	 * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */
 	lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start);
 
-	/* We fork off a child process, which wakes the Launcher whenever one
-	 * of the input file descriptors needs attention.  We call this the
-	 * Waker, and we'll cover it in a moment. */
-	waker_fd = setup_waker(lguest_fd);
+	/* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the
+	 * input file descriptors needs attention.  We call this the Waker, and
+	 * we'll cover it in a moment. */
+	setup_waker(lguest_fd);
 
 	/* Finally, run the Guest.  This doesn't return. */
 	run_guest(lguest_fd);

Documentation/local_ops.txt

@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ It can be done by slightly modifying the standard atomic operations : only
 their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on
 i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does
 not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h
-in your archtecture's local.h is sufficient.
+in your architecture's local.h is sufficient.
 
 The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an
 atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a

Documentation/md.txt

@@ -236,6 +236,11 @@ All md devices contain:
      writing the word for the desired state, however some states
      cannot be explicitly set, and some transitions are not allowed.
 
+     Select/poll works on this file.  All changes except between
+     	active_idle and active (which can be frequent and are not
+	very interesting) are notified.  active->active_idle is
+	reported if the metadata is externally managed.
+
      clear
          No devices, no size, no level
          Writing is equivalent to STOP_ARRAY ioctl
@@ -292,6 +297,10 @@ Each directory contains:
 	      writemostly - device will only be subject to read
 		         requests if there are no other options.
 			 This applies only to raid1 arrays.
+	      blocked  - device has failed, metadata is "external",
+	                 and the failure hasn't been acknowledged yet.
+			 Writes that would write to this device if
+			 it were not faulty are blocked.
 	      spare    - device is working, but not a full member.
 			 This includes spares that are in the process
 			 of being recovered to
@@ -301,6 +310,12 @@ Each directory contains:
 	Writing "remove" removes the device from the array.
 	Writing "writemostly" sets the writemostly flag.
 	Writing "-writemostly" clears the writemostly flag.
+	Writing "blocked" sets the "blocked" flag.
+	Writing "-blocked" clear the "blocked" flag and allows writes
+		to complete.
+
+	This file responds to select/poll. Any change to 'faulty'
+	or 'blocked' causes an event.
 
       errors
 	An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on
@@ -332,7 +347,7 @@ Each directory contains:
         for storage of data.  This will normally be the same as the
 	component_size.  This can be written while assembling an
         array.  If a value less than the current component_size is
-        written, component_size will be reduced to this value.
+        written, it will be rejected.
 
 
 An active md device will also contain and entry for each active device
@@ -381,6 +396,19 @@ also have
 	'check' and 'repair' will start the appropriate process
            providing the current state is 'idle'.
 
+      This file responds to select/poll.  Any important change in the value
+      triggers a poll event.  Sometimes the value will briefly be
+      "recover" if a recovery seems to be needed, but cannot be
+      achieved. In that case, the transition to "recover" isn't
+      notified, but the transition away is.
+
+   degraded
+      This contains a count of the number of devices by which the
+      arrays is degraded.  So an optimal array with show '0'.  A
+      single failed/missing drive will show '1', etc.
+      This file responds to select/poll, any increase or decrease
+      in the count of missing devices will trigger an event.
+
    mismatch_count
       When performing 'check' and 'repair', and possibly when
       performing 'resync', md will count the number of errors that are

Documentation/moxa-smartio

@@ -1,14 +1,22 @@
 =============================================================================
-
-	MOXA Smartio Family Device Driver Ver 1.1 Installation Guide
-		    for Linux Kernel 2.2.x and 2.0.3x
-	       Copyright (C) 1999, Moxa Technologies Co, Ltd.
+          MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
+		    for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x
+	       Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
 =============================================================================
+Date: 01/21/2008
+
 Content
 
 1. Introduction
 2. System Requirement
 3. Installation
+   3.1 Hardware installation
+   3.2 Driver files
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
+   3.6 Custom configuration
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
 4. Utilities
 5. Setserial
 6. Troubleshooting
@@ -16,27 +24,48 @@ Content
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 1. Introduction
 
-   The Smartio family Linux driver, Ver. 1.1, supports following multiport
+   The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
    boards.
 
-    -C104P/H/HS, C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, CI-104J 4 port multiport board.
-    -C168P/H/HS, C168H/PCI 8 port multiport board.
-
-   This driver has been modified a little and cleaned up from the Moxa
-   contributed driver code and merged into Linux 2.2.14pre. In particular
-   official major/minor numbers have been assigned which are different to
-   those the original Moxa supplied driver used.
+    - 2 ports multiport board
+	CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF
+	CP-132U-I, CP-132UL,
+	CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS,
+	CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS,
+	(C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S)
+
+    - 4 ports multiport board
+	CP-104EL,
+	CP-104UL, CP-104JU,
+	CP-134U, CP-134U-I,
+	C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI,
+	CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL,
+	C104H, C104HS,
+	CI-104J, CI-104JS,
+	CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
+	(C114HI, CT-114I, C104P)
+	POS-104UL,
+	CB-114,
+	CB-134I
+
+    - 8 ports multiport board
+	CP-118EL, CP-168EL,
+	CP-118U, CP-168U,
+	C168H/PCI,
+	C168H, C168HS,
+	(C168P),
+	CB-108
 
    This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel
-   2.2.5 and backward compatible to 2.0.3x. This driver supports Intel x86 and
-   Alpha hardware platform. In order to maintain compatibility, this version
-   has also been properly tested with RedHat, OpenLinux, TurboLinux and
-   S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem occurs, please contact
-   Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
+   2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order
+   to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with
+   RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem
+   occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
 
    In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
    version. They are
-    - msdiag     Diagnostic program for detecting installed Moxa Smartio boards.
+    - msdiag     Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
+                 Smartio/Industio boards.
     - msmon      Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
     - msterm     A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
 	         ports.
@@ -47,8 +76,7 @@ Content
    GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General
    Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail.
 
-   In Moxa's ftp sites, you may always find latest driver at
-   ftp://ftp.moxa.com  or ftp://ftp.moxa.com.tw.
+   In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://web.moxa.com.
 
    This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver)
    or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following
@@ -61,18 +89,27 @@ Content
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 2. System Requirement
-   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 or Alpha machine
-   - Kernel version: 2.0.3x or 2.2.x
+   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
+   - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
    - gcc version 2.72 or later
    - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 3. Installation
 
+   3.1 Hardware installation
+   3.2 Driver files
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x.
+   3.6 Custom configuration
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
+
+
    3.1 Hardware installation
 
-       There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio family multiport
-       board.
+       There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
+       family multiport board.
 
        ISA board
        ---------
@@ -81,47 +118,57 @@ Content
        installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
        Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
 
-       PCI board
-       ---------
+       PCI/UPCI board
+       --------------
        You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
        with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
        procedure in User's Manual in advance.
 
-       IRQ Sharing
+       PCI IRQ Sharing
        -----------
        Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
-       4 Moxa Smartio Family multiport boards can be installed together on
-       one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+       4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
+       together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+
 
-   3.2 Driver files and device naming convention
+   3.2 Driver files
 
        The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
        first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
        directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below.
 
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
        # cd /moxa
-       # tar xvf /dev/fd0 
+       # tar xvf /dev/fd0
+
        or
+
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
        # cd /moxa
        # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz .
        # tar xvfz mxser.tgz
 
+
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+
        You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
        Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
-       run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.3.
-       If static driver is required, please refer to 3.4.
+       run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
+       If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
 
        Dialin and callout port
        -----------------------
-       This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There're
+       This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
        two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
        which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
        is "cumxx".
 
        Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
        -----------------------------------------------
-       Naming convention for each Smartio multiport board is pre-defined
-       as below.
+       Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
+       pre-defined as below.
 
        Board Num.	 Dial-in Port	      Callout port
        1st board	ttyM0  - ttyM7	      cum0  - cum7
@@ -129,6 +176,12 @@ Content
        3rd board	ttyM16 - ttyM23       cum16 - cum23
        4th board	ttyM24 - ttym31       cum24 - cum31
 
+
+       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+       Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
+       device instead.
+       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+
        Board sequence
        --------------
        This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
@@ -138,69 +191,131 @@ Content
        For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
        has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
 
-   3.3 Module driver configuration
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
        Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
        installation, please skip this paragraph.
-       1. Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
 
-	  # make install
+
+       ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver--------------------
+       3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
+          Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
+          which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
+          script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
+          This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
+          need to do this procedure when:
+          a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
+             section.
+          b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
+             add/delete one MOXA board.
+          c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
+             shell script "msmknod"
+
+          The procedure is:
+	  # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+	  # ./msmknod
+
+          This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
+          device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
+          to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
+          numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
+          you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
+          for more detailed procedure.
+          Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
+          naming.
+
+       3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
+          Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
+          all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
+          But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
+          code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
+          "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
+
+          Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
+
+	  # make clean; make install
+
+          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+	  For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
+	  # make clean; make installsp1
+
+	  For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
+	  # make clean; make installsp2
+          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
 
 	  The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
-	  and copied to system directories respectively.Then run
+	  and copied to system directories respectively.
 
-	  # insmod mxser
+       ------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
+       3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
 
-	  to activate the modular driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
-	  if "mxser.o" is activated.
+	  # modprobe mxser <argument>
 
-       2. Create special files by executing "msmknod".
-	  # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-	  # ./msmknod
+	  will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
+	  if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
+          <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
+          information.
+
+
+       ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
+       3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute
+          "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
+	  "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
+          However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
+          eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
+          achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
+          the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
 
-	  Default major numbers for dial-in device and callout device are
-	  174, 175. Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same
-	  device naming.
+          But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
+          to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
+          rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
+          manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
+          encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
+          completed, follow the below step.
 
-       3. Up to now, you may manually execute "insmod mxser" to activate
-	  this driver and run "rmmod mxser" to remove it. However, it's
-	  better to have a boot time configuration to eliminate manual
-	  operation.
-	  Boot time configuration can be achieved by rc file. Run following
-	  command for setting rc files.
+	  Run following command for setting rc files.
 
 	  # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
 	  # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
 	  # cd /etc/rc.d
 
-	  You may have to modify part of the content in rc.mxser to specify
-          parameters for ISA board. Please refer to rc.mxser for more detail.
-          Find "rc.serial". If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, create it by vi.
-	  Add "rc.mxser" in last line. Next, open rc.local by vi
-	  and append following content.
+	  Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
+	  create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
+	  Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line,
 
-	  if [ -f /etc/rc.d/rc.serial ]; then
-	     sh /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
-	  fi
+          Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
 
-       4. Reboot and check if mxser.o activated by "lsmod" command.
-       5. If you'd like to drive Smartio ISA boards in the system, you'll
-	  have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given board while
-          activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are as follows.
+       3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
+          you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
+	  board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
+	  as follows.
 
-	  insmod mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
+	  modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
 				|      |     |	  |
 				|      |     |	  +- 4th ISA board
 				|      |     +------ 3rd ISA board
 				|      +------------ 2nd ISA board
 				+------------------- 1st ISA board
 
-   3.4 Static driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
+
+       Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
+             source package.
+
+       3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel.
+          # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
+          # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
+
+          For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
+          # cd /usr/src
+          # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
 
-       1. Create link
+       3.5.2 Create link
 	  # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
 	  # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
 
-       2. Add CAP address list for ISA boards
+       3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user,
+          please skip this step.
+
 	  In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
 	  parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
 	  assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
@@ -222,73 +337,55 @@ Content
 	     static int mxserBoardCAP[]
 	     = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
 
-       3. Modify tty_io.c
-	  # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/
-	  # vi tty_io.c
-	    Find pty_init(), insert "mxser_init()" as
+       3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
 
-	    pty_init();
-	    mxser_init();
+          Configure the kernel:
 
-       4. Modify tty.h
-	  # cd /usr/src/linux/include/linux
-	  # vi tty.h
-	    Find extern int tty_init(void), insert "mxser_init()" as
+            # cd /usr/src/linux
+            # make menuconfig
 
-	    extern int tty_init(void);
-	    extern int mxser_init(void);
-     
-       5. Modify Makefile
-	  # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
-	  # vi Makefile
-	    Find L_OBJS := tty_io.o ...... random.o, add
-	    "mxser.o" at last of this line as
-	    L_OBJS := tty_io.o ....... mxser.o
+          You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
+          devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
+          SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
+          select [Exit] to exit this program.
 
-       6. Rebuild kernel
-	  The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding,for your reference only.
+       3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
+	  The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
+          reference only.
 	  For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document.
 
-	  If 'lilo' utility is installed, please use 'make zlilo' to rebuild
-	  kernel. If 'lilo' is not installed, please follow the following steps.
-
 	   a. cd /usr/src/linux
-	   b. make clean			     /* take a few minutes */
-	   c. make bzImage		   /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
-	   d. Backup original boot kernel.		  /* optional step */
-	   e. cp /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/bzImage /boot/vmlinuz
+	   b. make clean	     /* take a few minutes */
+	   c. make dep		     /* take a few minutes */
+	   d. make bzImage	     /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
+	   e. make install	     /* copy boot image to correct position */
 	   f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
-	      correct position. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should
-	      check /etc/lilo.conf 'image' item specified the path
-	      which is the 'vmlinuz' path, or you will load wrong
-	      (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
-	   g. chmod 400 /vmlinuz
-	   h. lilo
-	   i. rdev -R /vmlinuz 1
-	   j. sync
-
-	  Note that if the result of "make zImage" is ERROR, then you have to
-	  go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make config" in directory
-	  /usr/src/linux or "setup".
-
-	  Since system include file, /usr/src/linux/include/linux/interrupt.h,
-	  is modified each time the MOXA driver is installed, kernel rebuilding
-	  is inevitable. And it takes about 10 to 20 minutes depends on the
-	  machine.
-
-       7. Make utility
-	  # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
-	  # make install
-       
-       8. Make special file
+	      correct position.
+	   g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
+	      'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
+	      or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
+	      After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
+
+	  Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
+	  go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
+          directory /usr/src/linux.
+
+
+       3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
           # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
           # ./msmknod
 
-       9. Reboot
+       3.5.7 Make utility
+	  # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
+	  # make clean; make install
+
+       3.5.8 Reboot
 
-   3.5 Custom configuration
+
+
+   3.6 Custom configuration
        Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
-       still can change the device name and major number.The instruction to
+       still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
        change these parameters are shown as below.
 
        Change Device name
@@ -306,33 +403,37 @@ Content
        2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
        major numbers.
 
-       1. Find free major numbers
+       3.6.1 Find free major numbers
 	  In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
 	  in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
 	  e.g. 40, 45.
-       2. Create special files
+       3.6.2 Create special files
 	  Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
 	  specified major numbers.
-       3. Modify driver with new major number
+       3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
 	  Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
 	  contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below.
 	  #define	  MXSERMAJOR		  40
 	  #define	  MXSERCUMAJOR		  45
-       4. Run # make install in /moxa/mxser/driver.
+       3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
 
-   3.6 Verify driver installation
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
        You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
        log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 4. Utilities
    There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
    msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
    be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
 
+   Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
+   make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
+
    msdiag - Diagnostic
    --------------------
-   This utility provides the function to detect what Moxa Smartio multiport
-   board exists in the system.
+   This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
+   board found by driver in the system.
 
    msmon - Port Monitoring
    -----------------------
@@ -353,12 +454,13 @@ Content
    application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
    port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
    dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 5. Setserial
 
    Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
 
-   uart 	  set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
+   uart		  set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
    close_delay	  set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
 		  should be kept low while being closed.
    closing_wait   set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the
@@ -366,7 +468,13 @@ Content
 		  being closed, before the receiver is disable.
    spd_hi	  Use  57.6kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
    spd_vhi	  Use  115.2kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_shi	  Use  230.4kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_warp	  Use  460.8kb	when  the application requests 38.4kb.
    spd_normal	  Use  38.4kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_cust	  Use  the custom divisor to set the speed when  the
+		  application requests 38.4kb.
+   divisor	  This option set the custom divison.
+   baud_base	  This option set the base baud rate.
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 6. Troubleshooting
@@ -375,8 +483,9 @@ Content
    possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
    support team to get more help.
 
-   Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio family boards found. Fifth board and
-	      after are ignored.
+
+   Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
+              and after are ignored.
    Solution:
    To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
    driver supports up to 4 boards.
@@ -384,7 +493,7 @@ Content
    Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
    Solution:
    Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
-   which device causes the situation,please check /proc/interrupts to find
+   which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
    free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
 
    Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
@@ -397,15 +506,18 @@ Content
    Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
    "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
 
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family driver!
+   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
    Solution:
    Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
-   Please refer to previous section 3.5 to change a free major number for
+   Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
    Moxa driver.
 
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family callout driver!
+   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
    Solution:
    Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
-   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.5 to
+   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
    change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
+
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+

Documentation/networking/bonding.txt

@@ -289,35 +289,73 @@ downdelay
 fail_over_mac
 
 	Specifies whether active-backup mode should set all slaves to
-	the same MAC address (the traditional behavior), or, when
-	enabled, change the bond's MAC address when changing the
-	active interface (i.e., fail over the MAC address itself).
-
-	Fail over MAC is useful for devices that cannot ever alter
-	their MAC address, or for devices that refuse incoming
-	broadcasts with their own source MAC (which interferes with
-	the ARP monitor).
-
-	The down side of fail over MAC is that every device on the
-	network must be updated via gratuitous ARP, vs. just updating
-	a switch or set of switches (which often takes place for any
-	traffic, not just ARP traffic, if the switch snoops incoming
-	traffic to update its tables) for the traditional method.  If
-	the gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be disrupted.
-
-	When fail over MAC is used in conjuction with the mii monitor,
-	devices which assert link up prior to being able to actually
-	transmit and receive are particularly susecptible to loss of
-	the gratuitous ARP, and an appropriate updelay setting may be
-	required.
-
-	A value of 0 disables fail over MAC, and is the default.  A
-	value of 1 enables fail over MAC.  This option is enabled
-	automatically if the first slave added cannot change its MAC
-	address.  This option may be modified via sysfs only when no
-	slaves are present in the bond.
-
-	This option was added in bonding version 3.2.0.
+	the same MAC address at enslavement (the traditional
+	behavior), or, when enabled, perform special handling of the
+	bond's MAC address in accordance with the selected policy.
+
+	Possible values are:
+
+	none or 0
+
+		This setting disables fail_over_mac, and causes
+		bonding to set all slaves of an active-backup bond to
+		the same MAC address at enslavement time.  This is the
+		default.
+
+	active or 1
+
+		The "active" fail_over_mac policy indicates that the
+		MAC address of the bond should always be the MAC
+		address of the currently active slave.  The MAC
+		address of the slaves is not changed; instead, the MAC
+		address of the bond changes during a failover.
+
+		This policy is useful for devices that cannot ever
+		alter their MAC address, or for devices that refuse
+		incoming broadcasts with their own source MAC (which
+		interferes with the ARP monitor).
+
+		The down side of this policy is that every device on
+		the network must be updated via gratuitous ARP,
+		vs. just updating a switch or set of switches (which
+		often takes place for any traffic, not just ARP
+		traffic, if the switch snoops incoming traffic to
+		update its tables) for the traditional method.  If the
+		gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be
+		disrupted.
+
+		When this policy is used in conjuction with the mii
+		monitor, devices which assert link up prior to being
+		able to actually transmit and receive are particularly
+		susecptible to loss of the gratuitous ARP, and an
+		appropriate updelay setting may be required.
+
+	follow or 2
+
+		The "follow" fail_over_mac policy causes the MAC
+		address of the bond to be selected normally (normally
+		the MAC address of the first slave added to the bond).
+		However, the second and subsequent slaves are not set
+		to this MAC address while they are in a backup role; a
+		slave is programmed with the bond's MAC address at
+		failover time (and the formerly active slave receives
+		the newly active slave's MAC address).
+
+		This policy is useful for multiport devices that
+		either become confused or incur a performance penalty
+		when multiple ports are programmed with the same MAC
+		address.
+
+
+	The default policy is none, unless the first slave cannot
+	change its MAC address, in which case the active policy is
+	selected by default.
+
+	This option may be modified via sysfs only when no slaves are
+	present in the bond.
+
+	This option was added in bonding version 3.2.0.  The "follow"
+	policy was added in bonding version 3.3.0.
 
 lacp_rate
 
@@ -338,7 +376,8 @@ max_bonds
 	Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this
 	instance of the bonding driver.  E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and
 	the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1
-	and bond2 will be created.  The default value is 1.
+	and bond2 will be created.  The default value is 1.  Specifying
+	a value of 0 will load bonding, but will not create any devices.
 
 miimon
 
@@ -501,6 +540,17 @@ mode
 		swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was
 		chosen.
 
+num_grat_arp
+
+	Specifies the number of gratuitous ARPs to be issued after a
+	failover event.  One gratuitous ARP is issued immediately after
+	the failover, subsequent ARPs are sent at a rate of one per link
+	monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever is active).
+
+	The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1.  This option
+	affects only the active-backup mode.  This option was added for
+	bonding version 3.3.0.
+
 primary
 
 	A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the
@@ -581,7 +631,7 @@ xmit_hash_policy
 		in environments where a layer3 gateway device is
 		required to reach most destinations.
 
-		This algorithm is 802.3ad complient.
+		This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant.
 
 	layer3+4